Annotation of gcc/expr.c, revision 1.1.1.1

1.1       root        1: /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
                      2:    Copyright (C) 1988, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
                      3: 
                      4: This file is part of GNU CC.
                      5: 
                      6: GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
                      7: it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
                      8: the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
                      9: any later version.
                     10: 
                     11: GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
                     12: but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
                     13: MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
                     14: GNU General Public License for more details.
                     15: 
                     16: You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
                     17: along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
                     18: the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.  */
                     19: 
                     20: 
                     21: #include "config.h"
                     22: #include "rtl.h"
                     23: #include "tree.h"
                     24: #include "flags.h"
                     25: #include "function.h"
                     26: #include "insn-flags.h"
                     27: #include "insn-codes.h"
                     28: #include "expr.h"
                     29: #include "insn-config.h"
                     30: #include "recog.h"
                     31: #include "output.h"
                     32: #include "gvarargs.h"
                     33: #include "typeclass.h"
                     34: 
                     35: #define CEIL(x,y) (((x) + (y) - 1) / (y))
                     36: 
                     37: /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
                     38:    from first to last or from last to first.  */
                     39: 
                     40: #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                     41: #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
                     42: #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED     /* If it's last to first */
                     43: #endif
                     44: #endif
                     45: 
                     46: #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
                     47: #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                     48: #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
                     49: #else
                     50: #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
                     51: #endif
                     52: #endif
                     53: 
                     54: /* Like STACK_BOUNDARY but in units of bytes, not bits.  */
                     55: #define STACK_BYTES (STACK_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT)
                     56: 
                     57: /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
                     58:    around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
                     59:    output indirect addresses.  If cse is to follow, we reject
                     60:    indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
                     61:    if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
                     62:    the same indirect address eventually.  */
                     63: int cse_not_expected;
                     64: 
                     65: /* Nonzero to generate code for all the subroutines within an
                     66:    expression before generating the upper levels of the expression.
                     67:    Nowadays this is never zero.  */
                     68: int do_preexpand_calls = 1;
                     69: 
                     70: /* Number of units that we should eventually pop off the stack.
                     71:    These are the arguments to function calls that have already returned.  */
                     72: int pending_stack_adjust;
                     73: 
                     74: /* Nonzero means stack pops must not be deferred, and deferred stack
                     75:    pops must not be output.  It is nonzero inside a function call,
                     76:    inside a conditional expression, inside a statement expression,
                     77:    and in other cases as well.  */
                     78: int inhibit_defer_pop;
                     79: 
                     80: /* A list of all cleanups which belong to the arguments of
                     81:    function calls being expanded by expand_call.  */
                     82: tree cleanups_this_call;
                     83: 
                     84: /* Nonzero means __builtin_saveregs has already been done in this function.
                     85:    The value is the pseudoreg containing the value __builtin_saveregs
                     86:    returned.  */
                     87: static rtx saveregs_value;
                     88: 
                     89: rtx store_expr ();
                     90: static void store_constructor ();
                     91: static rtx store_field ();
                     92: static rtx expand_builtin ();
                     93: static rtx compare ();
                     94: static rtx do_store_flag ();
                     95: static void preexpand_calls ();
                     96: static rtx expand_increment ();
                     97: static void init_queue ();
                     98: 
                     99: void do_pending_stack_adjust ();
                    100: static void do_jump_for_compare ();
                    101: static void do_jump_by_parts_equality ();
                    102: static void do_jump_by_parts_equality_rtx ();
                    103: static void do_jump_by_parts_greater ();
                    104: 
                    105: /* MOVE_RATIO is the number of move instructions that is better than
                    106:    a block move.  */
                    107: 
                    108: #ifndef MOVE_RATIO
                    109: #if defined (HAVE_movstrqi) || defined (HAVE_movstrhi) || defined (HAVE_movstrsi) || defined (HAVE_movstrdi)
                    110: #define MOVE_RATIO 2
                    111: #else
                    112: /* A value of around 6 would minimize code size; infinity would minimize
                    113:    execution time.  */
                    114: #define MOVE_RATIO 15
                    115: #endif
                    116: #endif
                    117: 
                    118: /* This is run at the start of compiling a function.  */
                    119: 
                    120: void
                    121: init_expr ()
                    122: {
                    123:   init_queue ();
                    124: 
                    125:   pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                    126:   inhibit_defer_pop = 0;
                    127:   cleanups_this_call = 0;
                    128:   saveregs_value = 0;
                    129: }
                    130: 
                    131: /* Save all variables describing the current status into the structure *P.
                    132:    This is used before starting a nested function.  */
                    133: 
                    134: void
                    135: save_expr_status (p)
                    136:      struct function *p;
                    137: {
                    138:   /* Instead of saving the postincrement queue, empty it.  */
                    139:   emit_queue ();
                    140: 
                    141:   p->pending_stack_adjust = pending_stack_adjust;
                    142:   p->inhibit_defer_pop = inhibit_defer_pop;
                    143:   p->cleanups_this_call = cleanups_this_call;
                    144:   p->saveregs_value = saveregs_value;
                    145: 
                    146:   pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                    147:   inhibit_defer_pop = 0;
                    148:   cleanups_this_call = 0;
                    149:   saveregs_value = 0;
                    150: }
                    151: 
                    152: /* Restore all variables describing the current status from the structure *P.
                    153:    This is used after a nested function.  */
                    154: 
                    155: void
                    156: restore_expr_status (p)
                    157:      struct function *p;
                    158: {
                    159:   pending_stack_adjust = p->pending_stack_adjust;
                    160:   inhibit_defer_pop = p->inhibit_defer_pop;
                    161:   cleanups_this_call = p->cleanups_this_call;
                    162:   saveregs_value = p->saveregs_value;
                    163: }
                    164: 
                    165: /* Manage the queue of increment instructions to be output
                    166:    for POSTINCREMENT_EXPR expressions, etc.  */
                    167: 
                    168: static rtx pending_chain;
                    169: 
                    170: /* Queue up to increment (or change) VAR later.  BODY says how:
                    171:    BODY should be the same thing you would pass to emit_insn
                    172:    to increment right away.  It will go to emit_insn later on.
                    173: 
                    174:    The value is a QUEUED expression to be used in place of VAR
                    175:    where you want to guarantee the pre-incrementation value of VAR.  */
                    176: 
                    177: static rtx
                    178: enqueue_insn (var, body)
                    179:      rtx var, body;
                    180: {
                    181:   pending_chain = gen_rtx (QUEUED, GET_MODE (var),
                    182:                           var, 0, 0, body, pending_chain);
                    183:   return pending_chain;
                    184: }
                    185: 
                    186: /* Use protect_from_queue to convert a QUEUED expression
                    187:    into something that you can put immediately into an instruction.
                    188:    If the queued incrementation has not happened yet,
                    189:    protect_from_queue returns the variable itself.
                    190:    If the incrementation has happened, protect_from_queue returns a temp
                    191:    that contains a copy of the old value of the variable.
                    192: 
                    193:    Any time an rtx which might possibly be a QUEUED is to be put
                    194:    into an instruction, it must be passed through protect_from_queue first.
                    195:    QUEUED expressions are not meaningful in instructions.
                    196: 
                    197:    Do not pass a value through protect_from_queue and then hold
                    198:    on to it for a while before putting it in an instruction!
                    199:    If the queue is flushed in between, incorrect code will result.  */
                    200: 
                    201: rtx
                    202: protect_from_queue (x, modify)
                    203:      register rtx x;
                    204:      int modify;
                    205: {
                    206:   register RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
                    207: 
                    208: #if 0  /* A QUEUED can hang around after the queue is forced out.  */
                    209:   /* Shortcut for most common case.  */
                    210:   if (pending_chain == 0)
                    211:     return x;
                    212: #endif
                    213: 
                    214:   if (code != QUEUED)
                    215:     {
                    216:       /* A special hack for read access to (MEM (QUEUED ...))
                    217:         to facilitate use of autoincrement.
                    218:         Make a copy of the contents of the memory location
                    219:         rather than a copy of the address, but not
                    220:         if the value is of mode BLKmode.  */
                    221:       if (code == MEM && GET_MODE (x) != BLKmode
                    222:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == QUEUED && !modify)
                    223:        {
                    224:          register rtx y = XEXP (x, 0);
                    225:          XEXP (x, 0) = QUEUED_VAR (y);
                    226:          if (QUEUED_INSN (y))
                    227:            {
                    228:              register rtx temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (x));
                    229:              emit_insn_before (gen_move_insn (temp, x),
                    230:                                QUEUED_INSN (y));
                    231:              return temp;
                    232:            }
                    233:          return x;
                    234:        }
                    235:       /* Otherwise, recursively protect the subexpressions of all
                    236:         the kinds of rtx's that can contain a QUEUED.  */
                    237:       if (code == MEM)
                    238:        XEXP (x, 0) = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                    239:       else if (code == PLUS || code == MULT)
                    240:        {
                    241:          XEXP (x, 0) = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                    242:          XEXP (x, 1) = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
                    243:        }
                    244:       return x;
                    245:     }
                    246:   /* If the increment has not happened, use the variable itself.  */
                    247:   if (QUEUED_INSN (x) == 0)
                    248:     return QUEUED_VAR (x);
                    249:   /* If the increment has happened and a pre-increment copy exists,
                    250:      use that copy.  */
                    251:   if (QUEUED_COPY (x) != 0)
                    252:     return QUEUED_COPY (x);
                    253:   /* The increment has happened but we haven't set up a pre-increment copy.
                    254:      Set one up now, and use it.  */
                    255:   QUEUED_COPY (x) = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (QUEUED_VAR (x)));
                    256:   emit_insn_before (gen_move_insn (QUEUED_COPY (x), QUEUED_VAR (x)),
                    257:                    QUEUED_INSN (x));
                    258:   return QUEUED_COPY (x);
                    259: }
                    260: 
                    261: /* Return nonzero if X contains a QUEUED expression:
                    262:    if it contains anything that will be altered by a queued increment.
                    263:    We handle only combinations of MEM, PLUS, MINUS and MULT operators
                    264:    since memory addresses generally contain only those.  */
                    265: 
                    266: static int
                    267: queued_subexp_p (x)
                    268:      rtx x;
                    269: {
                    270:   register enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
                    271:   switch (code)
                    272:     {
                    273:     case QUEUED:
                    274:       return 1;
                    275:     case MEM:
                    276:       return queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 0));
                    277:     case MULT:
                    278:     case PLUS:
                    279:     case MINUS:
                    280:       return queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 0))
                    281:        || queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 1));
                    282:     }
                    283:   return 0;
                    284: }
                    285: 
                    286: /* Perform all the pending incrementations.  */
                    287: 
                    288: void
                    289: emit_queue ()
                    290: {
                    291:   register rtx p;
                    292:   while (p = pending_chain)
                    293:     {
                    294:       QUEUED_INSN (p) = emit_insn (QUEUED_BODY (p));
                    295:       pending_chain = QUEUED_NEXT (p);
                    296:     }
                    297: }
                    298: 
                    299: static void
                    300: init_queue ()
                    301: {
                    302:   if (pending_chain)
                    303:     abort ();
                    304: }
                    305: 
                    306: /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
                    307:    Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating.
                    308:    UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
                    309:    This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension.  */
                    310: 
                    311: void
                    312: convert_move (to, from, unsignedp)
                    313:      register rtx to, from;
                    314:      int unsignedp;
                    315: {
                    316:   enum machine_mode to_mode = GET_MODE (to);
                    317:   enum machine_mode from_mode = GET_MODE (from);
                    318:   int to_real = GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode) == MODE_FLOAT;
                    319:   int from_real = GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode) == MODE_FLOAT;
                    320:   enum insn_code code;
                    321:   rtx libcall;
                    322: 
                    323:   /* rtx code for making an equivalent value.  */
                    324:   enum rtx_code equiv_code = (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND);
                    325: 
                    326:   to = protect_from_queue (to, 1);
                    327:   from = protect_from_queue (from, 0);
                    328: 
                    329:   if (to_real != from_real)
                    330:     abort ();
                    331: 
                    332:   if (to_mode == from_mode
                    333:       || (from_mode == VOIDmode && CONSTANT_P (from)))
                    334:     {
                    335:       emit_move_insn (to, from);
                    336:       return;
                    337:     }
                    338: 
                    339:   if (to_real)
                    340:     {
                    341: #ifdef HAVE_extendsfdf2
                    342:       if (HAVE_extendsfdf2 && from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == DFmode)
                    343:        {
                    344:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendsfdf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    345:          return;
                    346:        }
                    347: #endif
                    348: #ifdef HAVE_extendsftf2
                    349:       if (HAVE_extendsftf2 && from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == TFmode)
                    350:        {
                    351:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendsftf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    352:          return;
                    353:        }
                    354: #endif
                    355: #ifdef HAVE_extenddftf2
                    356:       if (HAVE_extenddftf2 && from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == TFmode)
                    357:        {
                    358:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extenddftf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    359:          return;
                    360:        }
                    361: #endif
                    362: #ifdef HAVE_truncdfsf2
                    363:       if (HAVE_truncdfsf2 && from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
                    364:        {
                    365:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdfsf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    366:          return;
                    367:        }
                    368: #endif
                    369: #ifdef HAVE_trunctfsf2
                    370:       if (HAVE_trunctfsf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
                    371:        {
                    372:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfsf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    373:          return;
                    374:        }
                    375: #endif
                    376: #ifdef HAVE_trunctfdf2
                    377:       if (HAVE_trunctfdf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == DFmode)
                    378:        {
                    379:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfdf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    380:          return;
                    381:        }
                    382: #endif
                    383: 
                    384:       if (from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == DFmode)
                    385:        libcall = extendsfdf2_libfunc;
                    386:       else if (from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
                    387:        libcall = truncdfsf2_libfunc;
                    388:       else
                    389:        /* This conversion is not implemented yet.  There aren't any TFmode
                    390:           library calls.  */
                    391:        abort ();
                    392: 
                    393:       emit_library_call (libcall, 0, to_mode, 1, from, from_mode);
                    394:       emit_move_insn (to, hard_libcall_value (to_mode));
                    395:       return;
                    396:     }
                    397: 
                    398:   /* Now both modes are integers.  */
                    399: 
                    400:   /* Handle expanding beyond a word.  */
                    401:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)
                    402:       && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
                    403:     {
                    404:       rtx insns;
                    405:       rtx lowpart;
                    406:       rtx fill_value;
                    407:       rtx lowfrom;
                    408:       int i;
                    409:       enum machine_mode lowpart_mode;
                    410:       int nwords = CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode), UNITS_PER_WORD);
                    411: 
                    412:       /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported.  */
                    413:       if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
                    414:          != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                    415:        {
                    416:          emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
                    417:          return;
                    418:        }
                    419:       /* Next, try converting via full word.  */
                    420:       else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD
                    421:               && ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, word_mode, unsignedp))
                    422:                   != CODE_FOR_nothing))
                    423:        {
                    424:          convert_move (gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), from, unsignedp);
                    425:          emit_unop_insn (code, to,
                    426:                          gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), equiv_code);
                    427:          return;
                    428:        }
                    429: 
                    430:       /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand.  */
                    431:       start_sequence ();
                    432: 
                    433:       /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary.  */
                    434:       if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
                    435:        lowpart_mode = word_mode;
                    436:       else
                    437:        lowpart_mode = from_mode;
                    438: 
                    439:       lowfrom = convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode, from, unsignedp);
                    440: 
                    441:       lowpart = gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode, to);
                    442:       emit_move_insn (lowpart, lowfrom);
                    443: 
                    444:       /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word.  */
                    445:       if (unsignedp)
                    446:        fill_value = const0_rtx;
                    447:       else
                    448:        {
                    449: #ifdef HAVE_slt
                    450:          if (HAVE_slt
                    451:              && insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_slt][0] == word_mode
                    452:              && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
                    453:            {
                    454:              emit_cmp_insn (lowfrom, const0_rtx, NE, 0, lowpart_mode, 0, 0);
                    455:              fill_value = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
                    456:              emit_insn (gen_slt (fill_value));
                    457:            }
                    458:          else
                    459: #endif
                    460:            {
                    461:              fill_value
                    462:                = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, lowpart_mode, lowfrom,
                    463:                                size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (lowpart_mode) - 1),
                    464:                                0, 0);
                    465:              fill_value = convert_to_mode (word_mode, fill_value, 1);
                    466:            }
                    467:        }
                    468: 
                    469:       /* Fill the remaining words.  */
                    470:       for (i = GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD; i < nwords; i++)
                    471:        {
                    472:          int index = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? nwords - i - 1 : i);
                    473:          rtx subword = operand_subword (to, index, 1, to_mode);
                    474: 
                    475:          if (subword == 0)
                    476:            abort ();
                    477: 
                    478:          if (fill_value != subword)
                    479:            emit_move_insn (subword, fill_value);
                    480:        }
                    481: 
                    482:       insns = get_insns ();
                    483:       end_sequence ();
                    484: 
                    485:       emit_no_conflict_block (insns, to, from, 0,
                    486:                              gen_rtx (equiv_code, to_mode, from));
                    487:       return;
                    488:     }
                    489: 
                    490:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
                    491:     {
                    492:       convert_move (to, gen_lowpart (word_mode, from), 0);
                    493:       return;
                    494:     }
                    495: 
                    496:   /* Handle pointer conversion */                      /* SPEE 900220 */
                    497:   if (to_mode == PSImode)
                    498:     {
                    499:       if (from_mode != SImode)
                    500:        from = convert_to_mode (SImode, from, unsignedp);
                    501: 
                    502: #ifdef HAVE_truncsipsi
                    503:       if (HAVE_truncsipsi)
                    504:        {
                    505:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsipsi, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    506:          return;
                    507:        }
                    508: #endif /* HAVE_truncsipsi */
                    509:       abort ();
                    510:     }
                    511: 
                    512:   if (from_mode == PSImode)
                    513:     {
                    514:       if (to_mode != SImode)
                    515:        {
                    516:          from = convert_to_mode (SImode, from, unsignedp);
                    517:          from_mode = SImode;
                    518:        }
                    519:       else
                    520:        {
                    521: #ifdef HAVE_extendpsisi
                    522:          if (HAVE_extendpsisi)
                    523:            {
                    524:              emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendpsisi, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    525:              return;
                    526:            }
                    527: #endif /* HAVE_extendpsisi */
                    528:          abort ();
                    529:        }
                    530:     }
                    531: 
                    532:   /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
                    533:      no more than a word long.  */
                    534: 
                    535:   /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode.  */
                    536:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)
                    537:       && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode),
                    538:                                GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
                    539:       && ((GET_CODE (from) == MEM
                    540:           && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from)
                    541:           && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0)))
                    542:          || GET_CODE (from) == REG
                    543:          || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG))
                    544:     {
                    545:       emit_move_insn (to, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
                    546:       return;
                    547:     }
                    548: 
                    549:   /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode.  */
                    550:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
                    551:     {
                    552:       /* Convert directly if that works.  */
                    553:       if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
                    554:          != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                    555:        {
                    556:          emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
                    557:          return;
                    558:        }
                    559:       else
                    560:        {
                    561:          enum machine_mode intermediate;
                    562: 
                    563:          /* Search for a mode to convert via.  */
                    564:          for (intermediate = from_mode; intermediate != VOIDmode;
                    565:               intermediate = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate))
                    566:            if ((can_extend_p (to_mode, intermediate, unsignedp)
                    567:                 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                    568:                && (can_extend_p (intermediate, from_mode, unsignedp)
                    569:                    != CODE_FOR_nothing))
                    570:              {
                    571:                convert_move (to, convert_to_mode (intermediate, from,
                    572:                                                   unsignedp), unsignedp);
                    573:                return;
                    574:              }
                    575: 
                    576:          /* No suitable intermediate mode.  */
                    577:          abort ();
                    578:        }
                    579:     }
                    580: 
                    581:   /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes.  */ 
                    582: 
                    583:   if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == SImode)
                    584:     {
                    585: #ifdef HAVE_truncdisi2
                    586:       if (HAVE_truncdisi2)
                    587:        {
                    588:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdisi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    589:          return;
                    590:        }
                    591: #endif
                    592:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    593:       return;
                    594:     }
                    595: 
                    596:   if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == HImode)
                    597:     {
                    598: #ifdef HAVE_truncdihi2
                    599:       if (HAVE_truncdihi2)
                    600:        {
                    601:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdihi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    602:          return;
                    603:        }
                    604: #endif
                    605:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    606:       return;
                    607:     }
                    608: 
                    609:   if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == QImode)
                    610:     {
                    611: #ifdef HAVE_truncdiqi2
                    612:       if (HAVE_truncdiqi2)
                    613:        {
                    614:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    615:          return;
                    616:        }
                    617: #endif
                    618:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    619:       return;
                    620:     }
                    621: 
                    622:   if (from_mode == SImode && to_mode == HImode)
                    623:     {
                    624: #ifdef HAVE_truncsihi2
                    625:       if (HAVE_truncsihi2)
                    626:        {
                    627:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsihi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    628:          return;
                    629:        }
                    630: #endif
                    631:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    632:       return;
                    633:     }
                    634: 
                    635:   if (from_mode == SImode && to_mode == QImode)
                    636:     {
                    637: #ifdef HAVE_truncsiqi2
                    638:       if (HAVE_truncsiqi2)
                    639:        {
                    640:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    641:          return;
                    642:        }
                    643: #endif
                    644:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    645:       return;
                    646:     }
                    647: 
                    648:   if (from_mode == HImode && to_mode == QImode)
                    649:     {
                    650: #ifdef HAVE_trunchiqi2
                    651:       if (HAVE_trunchiqi2)
                    652:        {
                    653:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunchiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    654:          return;
                    655:        }
                    656: #endif
                    657:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    658:       return;
                    659:     }
                    660: 
                    661:   /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
                    662:      the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
                    663:      and for which there was no special instruction.  */
                    664:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
                    665:     {
                    666:       rtx temp = force_reg (to_mode, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
                    667:       emit_move_insn (to, temp);
                    668:       return;
                    669:     }
                    670: 
                    671:   /* Mode combination is not recognized.  */
                    672:   abort ();
                    673: }
                    674: 
                    675: /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
                    676:    from converting X to mode MODE.
                    677:    Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
                    678:    UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
                    679:    This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
                    680:    or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.  */
                    681: 
                    682: rtx
                    683: convert_to_mode (mode, x, unsignedp)
                    684:      enum machine_mode mode;
                    685:      rtx x;
                    686:      int unsignedp;
                    687: {
                    688:   register rtx temp;
                    689: 
                    690:   x = protect_from_queue (x, 0);
                    691: 
                    692:   if (mode == GET_MODE (x))
                    693:     return x;
                    694: 
                    695:   /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
                    696:      a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_INT and
                    697:      we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
                    698:      the wrong if the constant appears negative.  What we want to do is
                    699:      make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones.  */
                    700: 
                    701:   if (unsignedp && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                    702:       && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == 2 * HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                    703:       && GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (x) < 0)
                    704:     return immed_double_const (INTVAL (x), 0, mode);
                    705: 
                    706:   /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
                    707:      are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
                    708:      non-volatile MEM.  Except for the constant case, we must be narrowing
                    709:      the operand.  */
                    710: 
                    711:   if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT
                    712:       || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                    713:          && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT
                    714:          && (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
                    715:              || (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
                    716:                  && ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
                    717:                      || GET_CODE (x) == REG)))))
                    718:     return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
                    719: 
                    720:   temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                    721:   convert_move (temp, x, unsignedp);
                    722:   return temp;
                    723: }
                    724: 
                    725: /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes
                    726:    from block FROM to block TO.  (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode).
                    727:    The caller must pass FROM and TO
                    728:     through protect_from_queue before calling.
                    729:    ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume.  */
                    730: 
                    731: struct move_by_pieces
                    732: {
                    733:   rtx to;
                    734:   rtx to_addr;
                    735:   int autinc_to;
                    736:   int explicit_inc_to;
                    737:   rtx from;
                    738:   rtx from_addr;
                    739:   int autinc_from;
                    740:   int explicit_inc_from;
                    741:   int len;
                    742:   int offset;
                    743:   int reverse;
                    744: };
                    745: 
                    746: static void move_by_pieces_1 ();
                    747: static int move_by_pieces_ninsns ();
                    748: 
                    749: static void
                    750: move_by_pieces (to, from, len, align)
                    751:      rtx to, from;
                    752:      int len, align;
                    753: {
                    754:   struct move_by_pieces data;
                    755:   rtx to_addr = XEXP (to, 0), from_addr = XEXP (from, 0);
                    756:   int max_size = 10000;
                    757: 
                    758:   data.offset = 0;
                    759:   data.to_addr = to_addr;
                    760:   data.from_addr = from_addr;
                    761:   data.to = to;
                    762:   data.from = from;
                    763:   data.autinc_to
                    764:     = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC
                    765:        || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
                    766:   data.autinc_from
                    767:     = (GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_DEC
                    768:        || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_INC
                    769:        || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_DEC);
                    770: 
                    771:   data.explicit_inc_from = 0;
                    772:   data.explicit_inc_to = 0;
                    773:   data.reverse
                    774:     = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
                    775:   if (data.reverse) data.offset = len;
                    776:   data.len = len;
                    777: 
                    778:   /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
                    779:      copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
                    780:      and use post-increment if available.  */
                    781:   if (!(data.autinc_from && data.autinc_to)
                    782:       && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len, align) > 2)
                    783:     {
                    784: #ifdef HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
                    785:       if (data.reverse && ! data.autinc_from)
                    786:        {
                    787:          data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (from_addr, len));
                    788:          data.autinc_from = 1;
                    789:          data.explicit_inc_from = -1;
                    790:        }
                    791: #endif
                    792: #ifdef HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
                    793:       if (! data.autinc_from)
                    794:        {
                    795:          data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
                    796:          data.autinc_from = 1;
                    797:          data.explicit_inc_from = 1;
                    798:        }
                    799: #endif
                    800:       if (!data.autinc_from && CONSTANT_P (from_addr))
                    801:        data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
                    802: #ifdef HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
                    803:       if (data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
                    804:        {
                    805:          data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, len));
                    806:          data.autinc_to = 1;
                    807:          data.explicit_inc_to = -1;
                    808:        }
                    809: #endif
                    810: #ifdef HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
                    811:       if (! data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
                    812:        {
                    813:          data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
                    814:          data.autinc_to = 1;
                    815:          data.explicit_inc_to = 1;
                    816:        }
                    817: #endif
                    818:       if (!data.autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr))
                    819:        data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
                    820:     }
                    821: 
                    822: #if defined (STRICT_ALIGNMENT) || defined (SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS)
                    823:   if (align > MOVE_MAX || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT)
                    824:     align = MOVE_MAX;
                    825: #else
                    826:   align = MOVE_MAX;
                    827: #endif
                    828: 
                    829:   /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
                    830:      successively smaller modes.  */
                    831: 
                    832:   while (max_size > 1)
                    833:     {
                    834:       enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
                    835:       enum insn_code icode;
                    836: 
                    837:       for (tmode = VOIDmode; (int) tmode < (int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE;
                    838:           tmode = (enum machine_mode) ((int) tmode + 1))
                    839:        if (GET_MODE_CLASS (tmode) == MODE_INT
                    840:            && GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
                    841:          mode = tmode;
                    842: 
                    843:       if (mode == VOIDmode)
                    844:        break;
                    845: 
                    846:       icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
                    847:       if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
                    848:          && align >= MIN (BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                    849:                           GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)))
                    850:        move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, &data);
                    851: 
                    852:       max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
                    853:     }
                    854: 
                    855:   /* The code above should have handled everything.  */
                    856:   if (data.len != 0)
                    857:     abort ();
                    858: }
                    859: 
                    860: /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
                    861:    ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume.  */
                    862: 
                    863: static int
                    864: move_by_pieces_ninsns (l, align)
                    865:      unsigned int l;
                    866:      int align;
                    867: {
                    868:   register int n_insns = 0;
                    869:   int max_size = 10000;
                    870: 
                    871: #if defined (STRICT_ALIGNMENT) || defined (SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS)
                    872:   if (align > MOVE_MAX || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT)
                    873:     align = MOVE_MAX;
                    874: #else
                    875:   align = MOVE_MAX;
                    876: #endif
                    877: 
                    878:   while (max_size > 1)
                    879:     {
                    880:       enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
                    881:       enum insn_code icode;
                    882: 
                    883:       for (tmode = VOIDmode; (int) tmode < (int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE;
                    884:           tmode = (enum machine_mode) ((int) tmode + 1))
                    885:        if (GET_MODE_CLASS (tmode) == MODE_INT
                    886:            && GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
                    887:          mode = tmode;
                    888: 
                    889:       if (mode == VOIDmode)
                    890:        break;
                    891: 
                    892:       icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
                    893:       if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
                    894:          && align >= MIN (BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                    895:                           GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)))
                    896:        n_insns += l / GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), l %= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
                    897: 
                    898:       max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
                    899:     }
                    900: 
                    901:   return n_insns;
                    902: }
                    903: 
                    904: /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces.  Move as many bytes as appropriate
                    905:    with move instructions for mode MODE.  GENFUN is the gen_... function
                    906:    to make a move insn for that mode.  DATA has all the other info.  */
                    907: 
                    908: static void
                    909: move_by_pieces_1 (genfun, mode, data)
                    910:      rtx (*genfun) ();
                    911:      enum machine_mode mode;
                    912:      struct move_by_pieces *data;
                    913: {
                    914:   register int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
                    915:   register rtx to1, from1;
                    916: 
                    917:   while (data->len >= size)
                    918:     {
                    919:       if (data->reverse) data->offset -= size;
                    920: 
                    921:       to1 = (data->autinc_to
                    922:             ? gen_rtx (MEM, mode, data->to_addr)
                    923:             : change_address (data->to, mode,
                    924:                               plus_constant (data->to_addr, data->offset)));
                    925:       from1 =
                    926:        (data->autinc_from
                    927:         ? gen_rtx (MEM, mode, data->from_addr)
                    928:         : change_address (data->from, mode,
                    929:                           plus_constant (data->from_addr, data->offset)));
                    930: 
                    931: #ifdef HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
                    932:       if (data->explicit_inc_to < 0)
                    933:        emit_insn (gen_sub2_insn (data->to_addr,
                    934:                                  gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size)));
                    935:       if (data->explicit_inc_from < 0)
                    936:        emit_insn (gen_sub2_insn (data->from_addr,
                    937:                                  gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size)));
                    938: #endif
                    939: 
                    940:       emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, from1));
                    941: #ifdef HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
                    942:       if (data->explicit_inc_to > 0)
                    943:        emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
                    944:                                  gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size)));
                    945:       if (data->explicit_inc_from > 0)
                    946:        emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr,
                    947:                                  gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size)));
                    948: #endif
                    949: 
                    950:       if (! data->reverse) data->offset += size;
                    951: 
                    952:       data->len -= size;
                    953:     }
                    954: }
                    955: 
                    956: /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X.
                    957:    This may be done with string-move instructions,
                    958:    with multiple scalar move instructions, or with a library call.
                    959: 
                    960:    Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE)
                    961:    with mode BLKmode.
                    962:    SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
                    963:    ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have,
                    964:    measured in bytes.  */
                    965: 
                    966: void
                    967: emit_block_move (x, y, size, align)
                    968:      rtx x, y;
                    969:      rtx size;
                    970:      int align;
                    971: {
                    972:   if (GET_MODE (x) != BLKmode)
                    973:     abort ();
                    974: 
                    975:   if (GET_MODE (y) != BLKmode)
                    976:     abort ();
                    977: 
                    978:   x = protect_from_queue (x, 1);
                    979:   y = protect_from_queue (y, 0);
                    980: 
                    981:   if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
                    982:     abort ();
                    983:   if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
                    984:     abort ();
                    985:   if (size == 0)
                    986:     abort ();
                    987: 
                    988:   if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                    989:       && (move_by_pieces_ninsns ((unsigned) INTVAL (size), align)
                    990:          < MOVE_RATIO))
                    991:     move_by_pieces (x, y, INTVAL (size), align);
                    992:   else
                    993:     {
                    994:       /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
                    995:         including more than one in the machine description unless
                    996:         the more limited one has some advantage.  */
                    997: #ifdef HAVE_movstrqi
                    998:       if (HAVE_movstrqi
                    999:          && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1000:          && ((unsigned) INTVAL (size)
                   1001:              < (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (QImode) - 1))))
                   1002:        {
                   1003:          rtx insn = gen_movstrqi (x, y, size,
                   1004:                                   gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align));
                   1005:          if (insn)
                   1006:            {
                   1007:              emit_insn (insn);
                   1008:              return;
                   1009:            }
                   1010:        }
                   1011: #endif
                   1012: #ifdef HAVE_movstrhi
                   1013:       if (HAVE_movstrhi
                   1014:          && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1015:          && ((unsigned) INTVAL (size)
                   1016:              < (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (HImode) - 1))))
                   1017:        {
                   1018:          rtx insn = gen_movstrhi (x, y, size,
                   1019:                                   gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align));
                   1020:          if (insn)
                   1021:            {
                   1022:              emit_insn (insn);
                   1023:              return;
                   1024:            }
                   1025:        }
                   1026: #endif
                   1027: #ifdef HAVE_movstrsi
                   1028:       if (HAVE_movstrsi)
                   1029:        {
                   1030:          rtx insn = gen_movstrsi (x, y, size,
                   1031:                                   gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align));
                   1032:          if (insn)
                   1033:            {
                   1034:              emit_insn (insn);
                   1035:              return;
                   1036:            }
                   1037:        }
                   1038: #endif
                   1039: #ifdef HAVE_movstrdi
                   1040:       if (HAVE_movstrdi)
                   1041:        {
                   1042:          rtx insn = gen_movstrdi (x, y, size,
                   1043:                                   gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align));
                   1044:          if (insn)
                   1045:            {
                   1046:              emit_insn (insn);
                   1047:              return;
                   1048:            }
                   1049:        }
                   1050: #endif
                   1051: 
                   1052: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
                   1053:       emit_library_call (memcpy_libfunc, 0,
                   1054:                         VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (x, 0), Pmode,
                   1055:                         XEXP (y, 0), Pmode,
                   1056:                         size, Pmode);
                   1057: #else
                   1058:       emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc, 0,
                   1059:                         VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (y, 0), Pmode,
                   1060:                         XEXP (x, 0), Pmode,
                   1061:                         size, Pmode);
                   1062: #endif
                   1063:     }
                   1064: }
                   1065: 
                   1066: /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
                   1067:    The number of registers to be filled is NREGS.  */
                   1068: 
                   1069: void
                   1070: move_block_to_reg (regno, x, nregs, mode)
                   1071:      int regno;
                   1072:      rtx x;
                   1073:      int nregs;
                   1074:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1075: {
                   1076:   int i;
                   1077:   rtx pat, last;
                   1078: 
                   1079:   if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
                   1080:     x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
                   1081: 
                   1082:   /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn.  */
                   1083: #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
                   1084:   last = get_last_insn ();
                   1085:   pat = gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno), x,
                   1086:                           gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, nregs));
                   1087:   if (pat)
                   1088:     {
                   1089:       emit_insn (pat);
                   1090:       return;
                   1091:     }
                   1092:   else
                   1093:     delete_insns_since (last);
                   1094: #endif
                   1095: 
                   1096:   for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
                   1097:     emit_move_insn (gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno + i),
                   1098:                    operand_subword_force (x, i, mode));
                   1099: }
                   1100: 
                   1101: /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
                   1102:    The number of registers to be filled is NREGS.  */
                   1103: 
                   1104: void
                   1105: move_block_from_reg (regno, x, nregs)
                   1106:      int regno;
                   1107:      rtx x;
                   1108:      int nregs;
                   1109: {
                   1110:   int i;
                   1111:   rtx pat, last;
                   1112: 
                   1113:   /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn.  */
                   1114: #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
                   1115:   last = get_last_insn ();
                   1116:   pat = gen_store_multiple (x, gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno),
                   1117:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, nregs));
                   1118:   if (pat)
                   1119:     {
                   1120:       emit_insn (pat);
                   1121:       return;
                   1122:     }
                   1123:   else
                   1124:     delete_insns_since (last);
                   1125: #endif
                   1126: 
                   1127:   for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
                   1128:     {
                   1129:       rtx tem = operand_subword (x, i, 1, BLKmode);
                   1130: 
                   1131:       if (tem == 0)
                   1132:        abort ();
                   1133: 
                   1134:       emit_move_insn (tem, gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno + i));
                   1135:     }
                   1136: }
                   1137: 
                   1138: /* Mark NREGS consecutive regs, starting at REGNO, as being live now.  */
                   1139: 
                   1140: void
                   1141: use_regs (regno, nregs)
                   1142:      int regno;
                   1143:      int nregs;
                   1144: {
                   1145:   int i;
                   1146: 
                   1147:   for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
                   1148:     emit_insn (gen_rtx (USE, VOIDmode, gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno + i)));
                   1149: }
                   1150: 
                   1151: /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT.
                   1152:    If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is its length in bytes.  */
                   1153: 
                   1154: void
                   1155: clear_storage (object, size)
                   1156:      rtx object;
                   1157:      int size;
                   1158: {
                   1159:   if (GET_MODE (object) == BLKmode)
                   1160:     {
                   1161: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
                   1162:       emit_library_call (memset_libfunc, 0,
                   1163:                         VOIDmode, 3,
                   1164:                         XEXP (object, 0), Pmode, const0_rtx, Pmode,
                   1165:                         gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size), Pmode);
                   1166: #else
                   1167:       emit_library_call (bzero_libfunc, 0,
                   1168:                         VOIDmode, 2,
                   1169:                         XEXP (object, 0), Pmode,
                   1170:                         gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size), Pmode);
                   1171: #endif
                   1172:     }
                   1173:   else
                   1174:     emit_move_insn (object, const0_rtx);
                   1175: }
                   1176: 
                   1177: /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
                   1178:    Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
                   1179:    Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
                   1180:    This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
                   1181: 
                   1182:    Return the last instruction emitted.  */
                   1183: 
                   1184: rtx
                   1185: emit_move_insn (x, y)
                   1186:      rtx x, y;
                   1187: {
                   1188:   enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
                   1189:   int i;
                   1190: 
                   1191:   x = protect_from_queue (x, 1);
                   1192:   y = protect_from_queue (y, 0);
                   1193: 
                   1194:   if (mode == BLKmode || (GET_MODE (y) != mode && GET_MODE (y) != VOIDmode))
                   1195:     abort ();
                   1196: 
                   1197:   if (CONSTANT_P (y) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y))
                   1198:     y = force_const_mem (mode, y);
                   1199: 
                   1200:   /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
                   1201:      for the machine.  */
                   1202:   if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
                   1203:       && ((! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0))
                   1204:           && ! push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
                   1205:          || (flag_force_addr
                   1206:              && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0)))))
                   1207:     x = change_address (x, VOIDmode, XEXP (x, 0));
                   1208: 
                   1209:   if (GET_CODE (y) == MEM
                   1210:       && (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (y), XEXP (y, 0))
                   1211:          || (flag_force_addr
                   1212:              && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (y, 0)))))
                   1213:     y = change_address (y, VOIDmode, XEXP (y, 0));
                   1214: 
                   1215:   if (mode == BLKmode)
                   1216:     abort ();
                   1217: 
                   1218:   if (mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                   1219:     return
                   1220:       emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code) (x, y));
                   1221: 
                   1222:   /* This will handle any multi-word mode that lacks a move_insn pattern.
                   1223:      However, you will get better code if you define such patterns,
                   1224:      even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions.  */
                   1225:   else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) >= UNITS_PER_WORD)
                   1226:     {
                   1227:       rtx last_insn = 0;
                   1228: 
                   1229:       for (i = 0;
                   1230:           i < (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)  + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   1231:           i++)
                   1232:        {
                   1233:          rtx xpart = operand_subword (x, i, 1, mode);
                   1234:          rtx ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
                   1235: 
                   1236:          /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
                   1237:             constant.  Otherwise, force it into a register.  If we still
                   1238:             can't get a part of Y, abort.  */
                   1239:          if (ypart == 0 && CONSTANT_P (y))
                   1240:            {
                   1241:              y = force_const_mem (mode, y);
                   1242:              ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
                   1243:            }
                   1244:          else if (ypart == 0)
                   1245:            ypart = operand_subword_force (y, i, mode);
                   1246: 
                   1247:          if (xpart == 0 || ypart == 0)
                   1248:            abort ();
                   1249: 
                   1250:          last_insn = emit_move_insn (xpart, ypart);
                   1251:        }
                   1252:       return last_insn;
                   1253:     }
                   1254:   else
                   1255:     abort ();
                   1256: }
                   1257: 
                   1258: /* Pushing data onto the stack.  */
                   1259: 
                   1260: /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
                   1261:    and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
                   1262:    Note that it is not possible for the value returned to be a QUEUED.
                   1263:    The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
                   1264: 
                   1265:    EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
                   1266:    BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
                   1267:    otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses.  */
                   1268: 
                   1269: rtx
                   1270: push_block (size, extra, below)
                   1271:      rtx size;
                   1272:      int extra, below;
                   1273: {
                   1274:   register rtx temp;
                   1275:   if (CONSTANT_P (size))
                   1276:     anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (size, extra));
                   1277:   else if (GET_CODE (size) == REG && extra == 0)
                   1278:     anti_adjust_stack (size);
                   1279:   else
                   1280:     {
                   1281:       rtx temp = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, size);
                   1282:       if (extra != 0)
                   1283:        temp = expand_binop (Pmode, add_optab,
                   1284:                             temp,
                   1285:                             gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra),
                   1286:                             temp, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   1287:       anti_adjust_stack (temp);
                   1288:     }
                   1289: 
                   1290: #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                   1291:   temp = virtual_outgoing_args_rtx;
                   1292:   if (extra != 0 && below)
                   1293:     temp = plus_constant (temp, extra);
                   1294: #else
                   1295:   if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
                   1296:     temp = plus_constant (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
                   1297:                          - INTVAL (size) - (below ? 0 : extra));
                   1298:   else if (extra != 0 && !below)
                   1299:     temp = gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
                   1300:                    negate_rtx (Pmode, plus_constant (size, extra)));
                   1301:   else
                   1302:     temp = gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
                   1303:                    negate_rtx (Pmode, size));
                   1304: #endif
                   1305: 
                   1306:   return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), temp);
                   1307: }
                   1308: 
                   1309: static rtx
                   1310: gen_push_operand ()
                   1311: {
                   1312:   return gen_rtx (STACK_PUSH_CODE, Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx);
                   1313: }
                   1314: 
                   1315: /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
                   1316:    type TYPE.
                   1317:    MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
                   1318:    carry mode info).
                   1319:    SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
                   1320:    needed only if X is BLKmode.
                   1321: 
                   1322:    ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume.
                   1323: 
                   1324:    If PARTIAL is nonzero, then copy that many of the first words
                   1325:    of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
                   1326:    The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL words,
                   1327:    rounded *down* to a multiple of PARM_BOUNDARY.
                   1328:    REG must be a hard register in this case.
                   1329: 
                   1330:    EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
                   1331:    This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocted.
                   1332: 
                   1333:    On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
                   1334:    the bottom of the argument block for this call.  We use indexing off there
                   1335:    to store the arg.  On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
                   1336:    argument block has not been preallocated.
                   1337: 
                   1338:    ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.  */
                   1339: 
                   1340: void
                   1341: emit_push_insn (x, mode, type, size, align, partial, reg, extra,
                   1342:                args_addr, args_so_far)
                   1343:      register rtx x;
                   1344:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1345:      tree type;
                   1346:      rtx size;
                   1347:      int align;
                   1348:      int partial;
                   1349:      rtx reg;
                   1350:      int extra;
                   1351:      rtx args_addr;
                   1352:      rtx args_so_far;
                   1353: {
                   1354:   rtx xinner;
                   1355:   enum direction stack_direction
                   1356: #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                   1357:     = downward;
                   1358: #else
                   1359:     = upward;
                   1360: #endif
                   1361: 
                   1362:   /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
                   1363:      `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
                   1364:      Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above.  */
                   1365:   enum direction where_pad = FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type);
                   1366: 
                   1367:   /* Invert direction if stack is post-update.  */
                   1368:   if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC || STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC)
                   1369:     if (where_pad != none)
                   1370:       where_pad = (where_pad == downward ? upward : downward);
                   1371: 
                   1372:   xinner = x = protect_from_queue (x, 0);
                   1373: 
                   1374:   if (mode == BLKmode)
                   1375:     {
                   1376:       /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially.  */
                   1377: 
                   1378:       register rtx temp;
                   1379:       int used = partial * UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   1380:       int offset = used % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
                   1381:       int skip;
                   1382:       
                   1383:       if (size == 0)
                   1384:        abort ();
                   1385: 
                   1386:       used -= offset;
                   1387: 
                   1388:       /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
                   1389:         because registers will take care of them.  */
                   1390: 
                   1391:       if (partial != 0)
                   1392:        xinner = change_address (xinner, BLKmode,
                   1393:                                 plus_constant (XEXP (xinner, 0), used));
                   1394: 
                   1395:       /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
                   1396:         skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
                   1397:         Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
                   1398:         by setting SKIP to 0.  */
                   1399: #ifndef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1400:       skip = 0;
                   1401: #else
                   1402:       skip = used;
                   1403: #endif
                   1404: 
                   1405: #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
                   1406:       /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
                   1407:         and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
                   1408:         on the stack for alignment purposes.  */
                   1409:       if (args_addr == 0
                   1410:          && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1411:          && skip == 0
                   1412:          && (move_by_pieces_ninsns ((unsigned) INTVAL (size) - used, align)
                   1413:              < MOVE_RATIO)
                   1414: #if defined (STRICT_ALIGNMENT) || defined (SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS)
                   1415:          /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
                   1416:             forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
                   1417:             and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble.  */
                   1418:          && (align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT
                   1419:              || PUSH_ROUNDING (align) == align)
                   1420: #endif
                   1421:          && PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size)) == INTVAL (size))
                   1422:        {
                   1423:          /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
                   1424:             or if padding below and stack grows up.
                   1425:             But if space already allocated, this has already been done.  */
                   1426:          if (extra && args_addr == 0
                   1427:              && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
                   1428:            anti_adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra));
                   1429: 
                   1430:          move_by_pieces (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, gen_push_operand ()), xinner,
                   1431:                          INTVAL (size) - used, align);
                   1432:        }
                   1433:       else
                   1434: #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
                   1435:        {
                   1436:          /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
                   1437:             to the address of that space.  */
                   1438: 
                   1439:          /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy.  */
                   1440:          if (partial != 0)
                   1441:            {
                   1442:              if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
                   1443:                size = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, INTVAL (size) - used);
                   1444:              else
                   1445:                size = expand_binop (GET_MODE (size), sub_optab, size,
                   1446:                                     gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, used),
                   1447:                                     0, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   1448:            }
                   1449: 
                   1450:          /* Get the address of the stack space.
                   1451:             In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
                   1452:             A single stack adjust will do.  */
                   1453:          if (! args_addr)
                   1454:            {
                   1455:              temp = push_block (size, extra, where_pad == downward);
                   1456:              extra = 0;
                   1457:            }
                   1458:          else if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
                   1459:            temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
                   1460:                                   plus_constant (args_addr,
                   1461:                                                  skip + INTVAL (args_so_far)));
                   1462:          else
                   1463:            temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
                   1464:                                   plus_constant (gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode,
                   1465:                                                           args_addr, args_so_far),
                   1466:                                                  skip));
                   1467: 
                   1468:          /* TEMP is the address of the block.  Copy the data there.  */
                   1469:          if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1470:              && (move_by_pieces_ninsns ((unsigned) INTVAL (size), align)
                   1471:                  < MOVE_RATIO))
                   1472:            {
                   1473:              move_by_pieces (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp), xinner,
                   1474:                              INTVAL (size), align);
                   1475:              goto ret;
                   1476:            }
                   1477:          /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
                   1478:             including more than one in the machine description unless
                   1479:             the more limited one has some advantage.  */
                   1480: #ifdef HAVE_movstrqi
                   1481:          if (HAVE_movstrqi
                   1482:              && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1483:              && ((unsigned) INTVAL (size)
                   1484:                  < (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (QImode) - 1))))
                   1485:            {
                   1486:              emit_insn (gen_movstrqi (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp),
                   1487:                                       xinner, size,
                   1488:                                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align)));
                   1489:              goto ret;
                   1490:            }
                   1491: #endif
                   1492: #ifdef HAVE_movstrhi
                   1493:          if (HAVE_movstrhi
                   1494:              && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1495:              && ((unsigned) INTVAL (size)
                   1496:                  < (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (HImode) - 1))))
                   1497:            {
                   1498:              emit_insn (gen_movstrhi (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp),
                   1499:                                       xinner, size,
                   1500:                                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align)));
                   1501:              goto ret;
                   1502:            }
                   1503: #endif
                   1504: #ifdef HAVE_movstrsi
                   1505:          if (HAVE_movstrsi)
                   1506:            {
                   1507:              emit_insn (gen_movstrsi (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp),
                   1508:                                       xinner, size,
                   1509:                                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align)));
                   1510:              goto ret;
                   1511:            }
                   1512: #endif
                   1513: #ifdef HAVE_movstrdi
                   1514:          if (HAVE_movstrdi)
                   1515:            {
                   1516:              emit_insn (gen_movstrdi (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp),
                   1517:                                       xinner, size,
                   1518:                                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align)));
                   1519:              goto ret;
                   1520:            }
                   1521: #endif
                   1522: 
                   1523: #ifndef ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
                   1524:          /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
                   1525:             copy it to another register to stabilize it.  We do not need
                   1526:             to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp.  */
                   1527: 
                   1528:          if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx, temp)
                   1529:              || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, temp))
                   1530:            temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
                   1531: #endif
                   1532: 
                   1533:          /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
                   1534:             to force it to pop the bcopy-arguments right away.  */
                   1535:          NO_DEFER_POP;
                   1536: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
                   1537:          emit_library_call (memcpy_libfunc, 0,
                   1538:                             VOIDmode, 3, temp, Pmode, XEXP (xinner, 0), Pmode,
                   1539:                             size, Pmode);
                   1540: #else
                   1541:          emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc, 0,
                   1542:                             VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (xinner, 0), Pmode, temp, Pmode,
                   1543:                             size, Pmode);
                   1544: #endif
                   1545:          OK_DEFER_POP;
                   1546:        }
                   1547:     }
                   1548:   else if (partial > 0)
                   1549:     {
                   1550:       /* Scalar partly in registers.  */
                   1551: 
                   1552:       int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   1553:       int i;
                   1554:       int not_stack;
                   1555:       /* # words of start of argument
                   1556:         that we must make space for but need not store.  */
                   1557:       int offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_WORD);
                   1558:       int args_offset = INTVAL (args_so_far);
                   1559:       int skip;
                   1560: 
                   1561:       /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
                   1562:         or if padding below and stack grows up.
                   1563:         But if space already allocated, this has already been done.  */
                   1564:       if (extra && args_addr == 0
                   1565:          && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
                   1566:        anti_adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra));
                   1567: 
                   1568:       /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
                   1569:         the real data.  Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
                   1570:         and leave the space uninitialized.  */
                   1571:       if (args_addr == 0)
                   1572:        offset = 0;
                   1573: 
                   1574:       /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
                   1575:         allocate on the stack.  */
                   1576:       not_stack = partial - offset;
                   1577: 
                   1578:       /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
                   1579:         skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
                   1580:         Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
                   1581:         by setting SKIP to 0.  */
                   1582: #ifndef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1583:       skip = 0;
                   1584: #else
                   1585:       skip = not_stack;
                   1586: #endif
                   1587: 
                   1588:       if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
                   1589:        x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
                   1590: 
                   1591:       /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
                   1592:         SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed.  */
                   1593:       if ((GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   1594:           && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) != MODE_INT))
                   1595:        x = copy_to_reg (x);
                   1596: 
                   1597:       /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg.  */
                   1598:       /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
                   1599:         has a size a multiple of a word.  */
                   1600: #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
                   1601:       for (i = not_stack; i < size; i++)
                   1602: #else
                   1603:       for (i = size - 1; i >= not_stack; i--)
                   1604: #endif
                   1605:        if (i >= not_stack + offset)
                   1606:          emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x, i, mode),
                   1607:                          word_mode, 0, 0, align, 0, 0, 0, args_addr,
                   1608:                          gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   1609:                                   args_offset + ((i - not_stack + skip)
                   1610:                                                  * UNITS_PER_WORD)));
                   1611:     }
                   1612:   else
                   1613:     {
                   1614:       rtx addr;
                   1615: 
                   1616:       /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
                   1617:         or if padding below and stack grows up.
                   1618:         But if space already allocated, this has already been done.  */
                   1619:       if (extra && args_addr == 0
                   1620:          && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
                   1621:        anti_adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra));
                   1622: 
                   1623: #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
                   1624:       if (args_addr == 0)
                   1625:        addr = gen_push_operand ();
                   1626:       else
                   1627: #endif
                   1628:        if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
                   1629:          addr
                   1630:            = memory_address (mode,
                   1631:                              plus_constant (args_addr, INTVAL (args_so_far)));
                   1632:       else
                   1633:        addr = memory_address (mode, gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode, args_addr,
                   1634:                                              args_so_far));
                   1635: 
                   1636:       emit_move_insn (gen_rtx (MEM, mode, addr), x);
                   1637:     }
                   1638: 
                   1639:  ret:
                   1640:   /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
                   1641:      into the appropriate registers.  Do this now, at the end,
                   1642:      since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls.  */
                   1643:   if (partial > 0)
                   1644:     move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg), x, partial, mode);
                   1645: 
                   1646:   if (extra && args_addr == 0 && where_pad == stack_direction)
                   1647:     anti_adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra));
                   1648: }
                   1649: 
                   1650: /* Output a library call to function FUN (a SYMBOL_REF rtx)
                   1651:    (emitting the queue unless NO_QUEUE is nonzero),
                   1652:    for a value of mode OUTMODE,
                   1653:    with NARGS different arguments, passed as alternating rtx values
                   1654:    and machine_modes to convert them to.
                   1655:    The rtx values should have been passed through protect_from_queue already.
                   1656: 
                   1657:    NO_QUEUE will be true if and only if the library call is a `const' call
                   1658:    which will be enclosed in REG_LIBCALL/REG_RETVAL notes; it is equivalent
                   1659:    to the variable is_const in expand_call.  */
                   1660: 
                   1661: void
                   1662: emit_library_call (va_alist)
                   1663:      va_dcl
                   1664: {
                   1665:   va_list p;
                   1666:   struct args_size args_size;
                   1667:   register int argnum;
                   1668:   enum machine_mode outmode;
                   1669:   int nargs;
                   1670:   rtx fun;
                   1671:   rtx orgfun;
                   1672:   int inc;
                   1673:   int count;
                   1674:   rtx argblock = 0;
                   1675:   CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far;
                   1676:   struct arg { rtx value; enum machine_mode mode; rtx reg; int partial;
                   1677:               struct args_size offset; struct args_size size; };
                   1678:   struct arg *argvec;
                   1679:   int old_inhibit_defer_pop = inhibit_defer_pop;
                   1680:   int no_queue = 0;
                   1681:   rtx use_insns;
                   1682: 
                   1683:   va_start (p);
                   1684:   orgfun = fun = va_arg (p, rtx);
                   1685:   no_queue = va_arg (p, int);
                   1686:   outmode = va_arg (p, enum machine_mode);
                   1687:   nargs = va_arg (p, int);
                   1688: 
                   1689:   /* Copy all the libcall-arguments out of the varargs data
                   1690:      and into a vector ARGVEC.
                   1691: 
                   1692:      Compute how to pass each argument.  We only support a very small subset
                   1693:      of the full argument passing conventions to limit complexity here since
                   1694:      library functions shouldn't have many args.  */
                   1695: 
                   1696:   argvec = (struct arg *) alloca (nargs * sizeof (struct arg));
                   1697: 
                   1698:   INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far, (tree)0, fun);
                   1699: 
                   1700:   args_size.constant = 0;
                   1701:   args_size.var = 0;
                   1702: 
                   1703:   for (count = 0; count < nargs; count++)
                   1704:     {
                   1705:       rtx val = va_arg (p, rtx);
                   1706:       enum machine_mode mode = va_arg (p, enum machine_mode);
                   1707: 
                   1708:       /* We cannot convert the arg value to the mode the library wants here;
                   1709:         must do it earlier where we know the signedness of the arg.  */
                   1710:       if (mode == BLKmode
                   1711:          || (GET_MODE (val) != mode && GET_MODE (val) != VOIDmode))
                   1712:        abort ();
                   1713: 
                   1714:       /* On some machines, there's no way to pass a float to a library fcn.
                   1715:         Pass it as a double instead.  */
                   1716: #ifdef LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
                   1717:       if (LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE && mode == SFmode)
                   1718:        val = convert_to_mode (DFmode, val), mode = DFmode;
                   1719: #endif
                   1720: 
                   1721:       /* Make sure it is a reasonable operand for a move or push insn.  */
                   1722:       if (GET_CODE (val) != REG && GET_CODE (val) != MEM
                   1723:          && ! (CONSTANT_P (val) && LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (val)))
                   1724:        val = force_operand (val, 0);
                   1725: 
                   1726:       argvec[count].value = val;
                   1727:       argvec[count].mode = mode;
                   1728: 
                   1729: #ifdef FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
                   1730:       if (FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (args_so_far, mode, (tree)0, 1))
                   1731:        abort ();
                   1732: #endif
                   1733: 
                   1734:       argvec[count].reg = FUNCTION_ARG (args_so_far, mode, (tree)0, 1);
                   1735:       if (argvec[count].reg && GET_CODE (argvec[count].reg) == EXPR_LIST)
                   1736:        abort ();
                   1737: #ifdef FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
                   1738:       argvec[count].partial
                   1739:        = FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (args_so_far, mode, (tree)0, 1);
                   1740: #else
                   1741:       argvec[count].partial = 0;
                   1742: #endif
                   1743: 
                   1744:       locate_and_pad_parm (mode, 0,
                   1745:                           argvec[count].reg && argvec[count].partial == 0,
                   1746:                           0, &args_size, &argvec[count].offset,
                   1747:                           &argvec[count].size);
                   1748: 
                   1749:       if (argvec[count].size.var)
                   1750:        abort ();
                   1751: 
                   1752: #ifndef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1753:       if (argvec[count].partial)
                   1754:        argvec[count].size.constant -= argvec[count].partial * UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   1755: #endif
                   1756: 
                   1757:       if (argvec[count].reg == 0 || argvec[count].partial != 0
                   1758: #ifdef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1759:          || 1
                   1760: #endif
                   1761:          )
                   1762:        args_size.constant += argvec[count].size.constant;
                   1763: 
                   1764: #ifdef ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
                   1765:       /* If this arg is actually passed on the stack, it might be
                   1766:         clobbering something we already put there (this library call might
                   1767:         be inside the evaluation of an argument to a function whose call
                   1768:         requires the stack).  This will only occur when the library call
                   1769:         has sufficient args to run out of argument registers.  Abort in
                   1770:         this case; if this ever occurs, code must be added to save and
                   1771:         restore the arg slot.  */
                   1772: 
                   1773:       if (argvec[count].reg == 0 || argvec[count].partial != 0)
                   1774:        abort ();
                   1775: #endif
                   1776: 
                   1777:       FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (args_so_far, mode, (tree)0, 1);
                   1778:     }
                   1779:   va_end (p);
                   1780: 
                   1781:   /* If this machine requires an external definition for library
                   1782:      functions, write one out.  */
                   1783:   assemble_external_libcall (fun);
                   1784: 
                   1785: #ifdef STACK_BOUNDARY
                   1786:   args_size.constant = (((args_size.constant + (STACK_BYTES - 1))
                   1787:                         / STACK_BYTES) * STACK_BYTES);
                   1788: #endif
                   1789: 
                   1790: #ifdef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1791:   args_size.constant = MAX (args_size.constant,
                   1792:                            REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE ((tree) 0));
                   1793: #endif
                   1794: 
                   1795: #ifdef ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
                   1796:   if (args_size.constant > current_function_outgoing_args_size)
                   1797:     current_function_outgoing_args_size = args_size.constant;
                   1798:   args_size.constant = 0;
                   1799: #endif
                   1800: 
                   1801: #ifndef PUSH_ROUNDING
                   1802:   argblock = push_block (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, args_size.constant),
                   1803:                         0, 0);
                   1804: #endif
                   1805: 
                   1806: #ifdef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
                   1807:   inc = -1;
                   1808:   argnum = nargs - 1;
                   1809: #else
                   1810:   inc = 1;
                   1811:   argnum = 0;
                   1812: #endif
                   1813: 
                   1814:   /* Push the args that need to be pushed.  */
                   1815: 
                   1816:   for (count = 0; count < nargs; count++, argnum += inc)
                   1817:     {
                   1818:       register enum machine_mode mode = argvec[argnum].mode;
                   1819:       register rtx val = argvec[argnum].value;
                   1820:       rtx reg = argvec[argnum].reg;
                   1821:       int partial = argvec[argnum].partial;
                   1822: 
                   1823:       if (! (reg != 0 && partial == 0))
                   1824:        emit_push_insn (val, mode, 0, 0, 0, partial, reg, 0, argblock,
                   1825:                        gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   1826:                                 argvec[count].offset.constant));
                   1827:       NO_DEFER_POP;
                   1828:     }
                   1829: 
                   1830: #ifdef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
                   1831:   argnum = nargs - 1;
                   1832: #else
                   1833:   argnum = 0;
                   1834: #endif
                   1835: 
                   1836:   /* Now load any reg parms into their regs.  */
                   1837: 
                   1838:   for (count = 0; count < nargs; count++, argnum += inc)
                   1839:     {
                   1840:       register enum machine_mode mode = argvec[argnum].mode;
                   1841:       register rtx val = argvec[argnum].value;
                   1842:       rtx reg = argvec[argnum].reg;
                   1843:       int partial = argvec[argnum].partial;
                   1844: 
                   1845:       if (reg != 0 && partial == 0)
                   1846:        emit_move_insn (reg, val);
                   1847:       NO_DEFER_POP;
                   1848:     }
                   1849: 
                   1850:   /* For version 1.37, try deleting this entirely.  */
                   1851:   if (! no_queue)
                   1852:     emit_queue ();
                   1853: 
                   1854:   /* Any regs containing parms remain in use through the call.  */
                   1855:   start_sequence ();
                   1856:   for (count = 0; count < nargs; count++)
                   1857:     if (argvec[count].reg != 0)
                   1858:       emit_insn (gen_rtx (USE, VOIDmode, argvec[count].reg));
                   1859: 
                   1860:   use_insns = get_insns ();
                   1861:   end_sequence ();
                   1862: 
                   1863:   fun = prepare_call_address (fun, 0, &use_insns);
                   1864: 
                   1865:   /* Don't allow popping to be deferred, since then
                   1866:      cse'ing of library calls could delete a call and leave the pop.  */
                   1867:   NO_DEFER_POP;
                   1868: 
                   1869:   /* We pass the old value of inhibit_defer_pop + 1 to emit_call_1, which
                   1870:      will set inhibit_defer_pop to that value.  */
                   1871: 
                   1872:   emit_call_1 (fun, get_identifier (XSTR (orgfun, 0)), args_size.constant, 0,
                   1873:               FUNCTION_ARG (args_so_far, VOIDmode, void_type_node, 1),
                   1874:               outmode != VOIDmode ? hard_libcall_value (outmode) : 0,
                   1875:               old_inhibit_defer_pop + 1, use_insns, no_queue);
                   1876: 
                   1877:   /* Now restore inhibit_defer_pop to its actual original value.  */
                   1878:   OK_DEFER_POP;
                   1879: }
                   1880: 
                   1881: /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO.
                   1882:    If WANT_VALUE is nonzero, return an rtx for the value of TO.
                   1883:    (This may contain a QUEUED rtx.)
                   1884:    Otherwise, the returned value is not meaningful.
                   1885: 
                   1886:    SUGGEST_REG is no longer actually used.
                   1887:    It used to mean, copy the value through a register
                   1888:    and return that register, if that is possible.
                   1889:    But now we do this if WANT_VALUE.
                   1890: 
                   1891:    If the value stored is a constant, we return the constant.  */
                   1892: 
                   1893: rtx
                   1894: expand_assignment (to, from, want_value, suggest_reg)
                   1895:      tree to, from;
                   1896:      int want_value;
                   1897:      int suggest_reg;
                   1898: {
                   1899:   register rtx to_rtx = 0;
                   1900:   rtx result;
                   1901: 
                   1902:   /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous.  */
                   1903: 
                   1904:   if (TREE_CODE (to) == ERROR_MARK)
                   1905:     return expand_expr (from, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   1906: 
                   1907:   /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
                   1908:      if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
                   1909:      Assignment of an array element at a constant index
                   1910:      has the same problem.  */
                   1911: 
                   1912:   if (TREE_CODE (to) == COMPONENT_REF
                   1913:       || TREE_CODE (to) == BIT_FIELD_REF
                   1914:       || (TREE_CODE (to) == ARRAY_REF
                   1915:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (to, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   1916:          && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (to))) == INTEGER_CST))
                   1917:     {
                   1918:       enum machine_mode mode1;
                   1919:       int bitsize;
                   1920:       int bitpos;
                   1921:       int unsignedp;
                   1922:       int volatilep = 0;
                   1923:       tree tem = get_inner_reference (to, &bitsize, &bitpos,
                   1924:                                      &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep);
                   1925: 
                   1926:       /* If we are going to use store_bit_field and extract_bit_field,
                   1927:         make sure to_rtx will be safe for multiple use.  */
                   1928: 
                   1929:       if (mode1 == VOIDmode && want_value)
                   1930:        tem = stabilize_reference (tem);
                   1931: 
                   1932:       to_rtx = expand_expr (tem, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   1933:       if (volatilep)
                   1934:        {
                   1935:          if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == MEM)
                   1936:            MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx) = 1;
                   1937: #if 0  /* This was turned off because, when a field is volatile
                   1938:          in an object which is not volatile, the object may be in a register,
                   1939:          and then we would abort over here.  */
                   1940:          else
                   1941:            abort ();
                   1942: #endif
                   1943:        }
                   1944: 
                   1945:       result = store_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode1, from,
                   1946:                            (want_value
                   1947:                             /* Spurious cast makes HPUX compiler happy.  */
                   1948:                             ? (enum machine_mode) TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to))
                   1949:                             : VOIDmode),
                   1950:                            unsignedp,
                   1951:                            /* Required alignment of containing datum.  */
                   1952:                            TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem)) / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                   1953:                            int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (tem)));
                   1954:       preserve_temp_slots (result);
                   1955:       free_temp_slots ();
                   1956: 
                   1957:       return result;
                   1958:     }
                   1959: 
                   1960:   /* Ordinary treatment.  Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx.
                   1961:      Don't re-expand if it was expanded already (in COMPONENT_REF case).  */
                   1962: 
                   1963:   if (to_rtx == 0)
                   1964:     to_rtx = expand_expr (to, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   1965: 
                   1966:   /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
                   1967:      the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
                   1968:      a value through a pointer into a structure value return block.  */
                   1969:   if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL && TREE_CODE (from) == INDIRECT_REF
                   1970:       && current_function_returns_struct
                   1971:       && !current_function_returns_pcc_struct)
                   1972:     {
                   1973:       rtx from_rtx = expand_expr (from, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   1974:       rtx size = expr_size (from);
                   1975: 
                   1976: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
                   1977:       emit_library_call (memcpy_libfunc, 0,
                   1978:                         VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode,
                   1979:                         XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode,
                   1980:                         size, Pmode);
                   1981: #else
                   1982:       emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc, 0,
                   1983:                         VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode,
                   1984:                         XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode,
                   1985:                         size, Pmode);
                   1986: #endif
                   1987: 
                   1988:       preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
                   1989:       free_temp_slots ();
                   1990:       return to_rtx;
                   1991:     }
                   1992: 
                   1993:   /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got.  */
                   1994: 
                   1995:   result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, want_value);
                   1996:   preserve_temp_slots (result);
                   1997:   free_temp_slots ();
                   1998:   return result;
                   1999: }
                   2000: 
                   2001: /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
                   2002:    and storing the value into TARGET.
                   2003:    Returns TARGET or an equivalent value.
                   2004:    TARGET may contain a QUEUED rtx.
                   2005: 
                   2006:    If SUGGEST_REG is nonzero, copy the value through a register
                   2007:    and return that register, if that is possible.
                   2008: 
                   2009:    If the value stored is a constant, we return the constant.  */
                   2010: 
                   2011: rtx
                   2012: store_expr (exp, target, suggest_reg)
                   2013:      register tree exp;
                   2014:      register rtx target;
                   2015:      int suggest_reg;
                   2016: {
                   2017:   register rtx temp;
                   2018:   int dont_return_target = 0;
                   2019: 
                   2020:   if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPOUND_EXPR)
                   2021:     {
                   2022:       /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
                   2023:         part.  */
                   2024:       expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
                   2025:       emit_queue ();
                   2026:       return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, suggest_reg);
                   2027:     }
                   2028:   else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COND_EXPR && GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode)
                   2029:     {
                   2030:       /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target.  Then
                   2031:         test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
                   2032:         side.  This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
                   2033:         For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this.  */
                   2034: 
                   2035:       rtx lab1 = gen_label_rtx (), lab2 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   2036: 
                   2037:       emit_queue ();
                   2038:       target = protect_from_queue (target, 1);
                   2039: 
                   2040:       NO_DEFER_POP;
                   2041:       jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), lab1);
                   2042:       store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, suggest_reg);
                   2043:       emit_queue ();
                   2044:       emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2));
                   2045:       emit_barrier ();
                   2046:       emit_label (lab1);
                   2047:       store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), target, suggest_reg);
                   2048:       emit_queue ();
                   2049:       emit_label (lab2);
                   2050:       OK_DEFER_POP;
                   2051:       return target;
                   2052:     }
                   2053:   else if (suggest_reg && GET_CODE (target) == MEM
                   2054:           && GET_MODE (target) != BLKmode)
                   2055:     /* If target is in memory and caller wants value in a register instead,
                   2056:        arrange that.  Pass TARGET as target for expand_expr so that,
                   2057:        if EXP is another assignment, SUGGEST_REG will be nonzero for it.
                   2058:        We know expand_expr will not use the target in that case.  */
                   2059:     {
                   2060:       temp = expand_expr (exp, cse_not_expected ? 0 : target,
                   2061:                          GET_MODE (target), 0);
                   2062:       if (GET_MODE (temp) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
                   2063:        temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
                   2064:       dont_return_target = 1;
                   2065:     }
                   2066:   else if (queued_subexp_p (target))
                   2067:     /* If target contains a postincrement, it is not safe
                   2068:        to use as the returned value.  It would access the wrong
                   2069:        place by the time the queued increment gets output.
                   2070:        So copy the value through a temporary and use that temp
                   2071:        as the result.  */
                   2072:     {
                   2073:       if (GET_MODE (target) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (target) != VOIDmode)
                   2074:        {
                   2075:          /* Expand EXP into a new pseudo.  */
                   2076:          temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
                   2077:          temp = expand_expr (exp, temp, GET_MODE (target), 0);
                   2078:        }
                   2079:       else
                   2080:        temp = expand_expr (exp, 0, GET_MODE (target), 0);
                   2081:       dont_return_target = 1;
                   2082:     }
                   2083:   else
                   2084:     {
                   2085:       temp = expand_expr (exp, target, GET_MODE (target), 0);
                   2086:       /* DO return TARGET if it's a specified hardware register.
                   2087:         expand_return relies on this.  */
                   2088:       if (!(target && GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   2089:            && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2090:          && CONSTANT_P (temp))
                   2091:        dont_return_target = 1;
                   2092:     }
                   2093: 
                   2094:   /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
                   2095:      Convert the value to TARGET's type first if nec.  */
                   2096: 
                   2097:   if (temp != target && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK)
                   2098:     {
                   2099:       target = protect_from_queue (target, 1);
                   2100:       if (GET_MODE (temp) != GET_MODE (target)
                   2101:          && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
                   2102:        {
                   2103:          int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2104:          if (dont_return_target)
                   2105:            {
                   2106:              /* In this case, we will return TEMP,
                   2107:                 so make sure it has the proper mode.
                   2108:                 But don't forget to store the value into TARGET.  */
                   2109:              temp = convert_to_mode (GET_MODE (target), temp, unsignedp);
                   2110:              emit_move_insn (target, temp);
                   2111:            }
                   2112:          else
                   2113:            convert_move (target, temp, unsignedp);
                   2114:        }
                   2115: 
                   2116:       else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode && TREE_CODE (exp) == STRING_CST)
                   2117:        {
                   2118:          /* Handle copying a string constant into an array.
                   2119:             The string constant may be shorter than the array.
                   2120:             So copy just the string's actual length, and clear the rest.  */
                   2121:          rtx size;
                   2122: 
                   2123:          emit_block_move (target, temp,
                   2124:                           gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   2125:                                    TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp)),
                   2126:                           TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT);
                   2127: 
                   2128:          temp = plus_constant (XEXP (target, 0), TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp));
                   2129:          size = plus_constant (expr_size (exp), - TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp));
                   2130:          if (size != const0_rtx)
                   2131:            {
                   2132: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
                   2133:              emit_library_call (memset_libfunc, 0, VOIDmode, 3,
                   2134:                                 temp, Pmode, const0_rtx, Pmode, size, Pmode);
                   2135: #else
                   2136:              emit_library_call (bzero_libfunc, 0, VOIDmode, 2,
                   2137:                                 temp, Pmode, size, Pmode);
                   2138: #endif
                   2139:            }
                   2140:        }
                   2141:       else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode)
                   2142:        emit_block_move (target, temp, expr_size (exp),
                   2143:                         TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT);
                   2144:       else
                   2145:        emit_move_insn (target, temp);
                   2146:     }
                   2147:   if (dont_return_target)
                   2148:     return temp;
                   2149:   return target;
                   2150: }
                   2151: 
                   2152: /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
                   2153:    TARGET is either a REG or a MEM.  */
                   2154: 
                   2155: static void
                   2156: store_constructor (exp, target)
                   2157:      tree exp;
                   2158:      rtx target;
                   2159: {
                   2160:   /* We know our target cannot conflict, since safe_from_p has been called.  */
                   2161: #if 0
                   2162:   /* Don't try copying piece by piece into a hard register
                   2163:      since that is vulnerable to being clobbered by EXP.
                   2164:      Instead, construct in a pseudo register and then copy it all.  */
                   2165:   if (GET_CODE (target) == REG && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2166:     {
                   2167:       rtx temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
                   2168:       store_constructor (exp, temp);
                   2169:       emit_move_insn (target, temp);
                   2170:       return;
                   2171:     }
                   2172: #endif
                   2173: 
                   2174:   if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == RECORD_TYPE
                   2175:       || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == UNION_TYPE)
                   2176:     {
                   2177:       register tree elt;
                   2178: 
                   2179:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == UNION_TYPE)
                   2180:        /* Inform later passes that the whole union value is dead.  */
                   2181:        emit_insn (gen_rtx (CLOBBER, VOIDmode, target));
                   2182:       /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure,
                   2183:         clear the whole structure first.  */
                   2184:       else if (list_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp))
                   2185:               != list_length (TYPE_FIELDS (TREE_TYPE (exp))))
                   2186:        clear_storage (target, int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   2187:       else
                   2188:        /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead.  */
                   2189:        emit_insn (gen_rtx (CLOBBER, VOIDmode, target));
                   2190: 
                   2191:       /* Store each element of the constructor into
                   2192:         the corresponding field of TARGET.  */
                   2193: 
                   2194:       for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp); elt; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
                   2195:        {
                   2196:          register tree field = TREE_PURPOSE (elt);
                   2197:          register enum machine_mode mode;
                   2198:          int bitsize;
                   2199:          int bitpos;
                   2200:          int unsignedp;
                   2201: 
                   2202:          bitsize = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field));
                   2203:          unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (field);
                   2204:          mode = DECL_MODE (field);
                   2205:          if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field))
                   2206:            mode = VOIDmode;
                   2207: 
                   2208:          if (TREE_CODE (DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   2209:            /* ??? This case remains to be written.  */
                   2210:            abort ();
                   2211: 
                   2212:          bitpos = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field));
                   2213: 
                   2214:          store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, TREE_VALUE (elt),
                   2215:                       /* The alignment of TARGET is
                   2216:                          at least what its type requires.  */
                   2217:                       VOIDmode, 0,
                   2218:                       TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                   2219:                       int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   2220:        }
                   2221:     }
                   2222:   else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == ARRAY_TYPE)
                   2223:     {
                   2224:       register tree elt;
                   2225:       register int i;
                   2226:       tree domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2227:       int minelt = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain));
                   2228:       int maxelt = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain));
                   2229:       tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2230: 
                   2231:       /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure,
                   2232:         clear the whole structure first.  */
                   2233: 
                   2234:       if (list_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp)) < maxelt - minelt + 1)
                   2235:        clear_storage (target, maxelt - minelt + 1);
                   2236:       else
                   2237:        /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead.  */
                   2238:        emit_insn (gen_rtx (CLOBBER, VOIDmode, target));
                   2239: 
                   2240:       /* Store each element of the constructor into
                   2241:         the corresponding element of TARGET, determined
                   2242:         by counting the elements.  */
                   2243:       for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), i = 0;
                   2244:           elt;
                   2245:           elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt), i++)
                   2246:        {
                   2247:          register enum machine_mode mode;
                   2248:          int bitsize;
                   2249:          int bitpos;
                   2250:          int unsignedp;
                   2251: 
                   2252:          mode = TYPE_MODE (elttype);
                   2253:          bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   2254:          unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (elttype);
                   2255: 
                   2256:          bitpos = (i * TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (elttype)));
                   2257: 
                   2258:          store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, TREE_VALUE (elt),
                   2259:                       /* The alignment of TARGET is
                   2260:                          at least what its type requires.  */
                   2261:                       VOIDmode, 0,
                   2262:                       TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                   2263:                       int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   2264:        }
                   2265:     }
                   2266: 
                   2267:   else
                   2268:     abort ();
                   2269: }
                   2270: 
                   2271: /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
                   2272:    into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
                   2273:    BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
                   2274:    If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
                   2275: 
                   2276:    If VALUE_MODE is VOIDmode, return nothing in particular.
                   2277:    UNSIGNEDP is not used in this case.
                   2278: 
                   2279:    Otherwise, return an rtx for the value stored.  This rtx
                   2280:    has mode VALUE_MODE if that is convenient to do.
                   2281:    In this case, UNSIGNEDP must be nonzero if the value is an unsigned type.
                   2282: 
                   2283:    ALIGN is the alignment that TARGET is known to have, measured in bytes.
                   2284:    TOTAL_SIZE is the size in bytes of the structure, or -1 if varying.  */
                   2285: 
                   2286: static rtx
                   2287: store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, value_mode,
                   2288:             unsignedp, align, total_size)
                   2289:      rtx target;
                   2290:      int bitsize, bitpos;
                   2291:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   2292:      tree exp;
                   2293:      enum machine_mode value_mode;
                   2294:      int unsignedp;
                   2295:      int align;
                   2296:      int total_size;
                   2297: {
                   2298:   int width_mask = 0;
                   2299: 
                   2300:   if (bitsize < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2301:     width_mask = (1 << bitsize) - 1;
                   2302: 
                   2303:   /* If we are storing into an unaligned field of an aligned union that is
                   2304:      in a register, we may have the mode of TARGET being an integer mode but
                   2305:      MODE == BLKmode.  In that case, get an aligned object whose size and
                   2306:      alignment are the same as TARGET and store TARGET into it (we can avoid
                   2307:      the store if the field being stored is the entire width of TARGET).  Then
                   2308:      call ourselves recursively to store the field into a BLKmode version of
                   2309:      that object.  Finally, load from the object into TARGET.  This is not
                   2310:      very efficient in general, but should only be slightly more expensive
                   2311:      than the otherwise-required unaligned accesses.  Perhaps this can be
                   2312:      cleaned up later.  */
                   2313: 
                   2314:   if (mode == BLKmode
                   2315:       && (GET_CODE (target) == REG || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG))
                   2316:     {
                   2317:       rtx object = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (target),
                   2318:                                      GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target)), 0);
                   2319:       rtx blk_object = copy_rtx (object);
                   2320: 
                   2321:       PUT_MODE (blk_object, BLKmode);
                   2322: 
                   2323:       if (bitsize != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (target)))
                   2324:        emit_move_insn (object, target);
                   2325: 
                   2326:       store_field (blk_object, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, VOIDmode, 0,
                   2327:                   align, total_size);
                   2328: 
                   2329:       emit_move_insn (target, object);
                   2330: 
                   2331:       return target;
                   2332:     }
                   2333: 
                   2334:   /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
                   2335:      is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
                   2336:      Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it.  */
                   2337: 
                   2338:   if (mode == VOIDmode || GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   2339:       || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG)
                   2340:     {
                   2341:       rtx temp = expand_expr (exp, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   2342:       /* Store the value in the bitfield.  */
                   2343:       store_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, temp, align, total_size);
                   2344:       if (value_mode != VOIDmode)
                   2345:        {
                   2346:          /* The caller wants an rtx for the value.  */
                   2347:          /* If possible, avoid refetching from the bitfield itself.  */
                   2348:          if (width_mask != 0
                   2349:              && ! (GET_CODE (target) == MEM && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target)))
                   2350:            return expand_and (temp,
                   2351:                               gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, width_mask), 0);
                   2352:          return extract_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp,
                   2353:                                    0, value_mode, 0, align, total_size);
                   2354:        }
                   2355:       return const0_rtx;
                   2356:     }
                   2357:   else
                   2358:     {
                   2359:       rtx addr = XEXP (target, 0);
                   2360:       rtx to_rtx;
                   2361: 
                   2362:       /* If a value is wanted, it must be the lhs;
                   2363:         so make the address stable for multiple use.  */
                   2364: 
                   2365:       if (value_mode != VOIDmode && GET_CODE (addr) != REG
                   2366:          && ! CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr)
                   2367:          /* A frame-pointer reference is already stable.  */
                   2368:          && ! (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
                   2369:                && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
                   2370:                && (XEXP (addr, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx
                   2371:                    || XEXP (addr, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx)))
                   2372:        addr = copy_to_reg (addr);
                   2373: 
                   2374:       /* Now build a reference to just the desired component.  */
                   2375: 
                   2376:       to_rtx = change_address (target, mode,
                   2377:                               plus_constant (addr, (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT)));
                   2378:       MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (to_rtx) = 1;
                   2379: 
                   2380:       return store_expr (exp, to_rtx, value_mode != VOIDmode);
                   2381:     }
                   2382: }
                   2383: 
                   2384: /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
                   2385:    or an ARRAY_REF, look for nested COMPONENT_REFs, BIT_FIELD_REFs, or
                   2386:    ARRAY_REFs at constant positions and find the ultimate containing object,
                   2387:    which we return.
                   2388: 
                   2389:    We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
                   2390:    bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
                   2391: 
                   2392:    If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
                   2393:    we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP.  Otherwise we don't change that.
                   2394: 
                   2395:    If the field is a bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode.  Otherwise, it
                   2396:    is a mode that can be used to access the field.  In that case, *PBITSIZE
                   2397:    is redundant.  */
                   2398: 
                   2399: tree
                   2400: get_inner_reference (exp, pbitsize, pbitpos, pmode, punsignedp, pvolatilep)
                   2401:      tree exp;
                   2402:      int *pbitsize;
                   2403:      int *pbitpos;
                   2404:      enum machine_mode *pmode;
                   2405:      int *punsignedp;
                   2406:      int *pvolatilep;
                   2407: {
                   2408:   tree size_tree = 0;
                   2409:   enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode;
                   2410: 
                   2411:   if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF)
                   2412:     {
                   2413:       size_tree = DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   2414:       if (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   2415:        mode = DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   2416:       *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   2417:     }
                   2418:   else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF)
                   2419:     {
                   2420:       size_tree = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   2421:       *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (exp);
                   2422:     }
                   2423:   else
                   2424:     {
                   2425:       mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2426:       *pbitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   2427:       *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2428:     }
                   2429:       
                   2430:   if (size_tree)
                   2431:     {
                   2432:       if (TREE_CODE (size_tree) != INTEGER_CST)
                   2433:        abort ();
                   2434: 
                   2435:       *pbitsize = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (size_tree);
                   2436:     }
                   2437: 
                   2438:   /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
                   2439:      and find the ultimate containing object.  */
                   2440: 
                   2441:   *pbitpos = 0;
                   2442: 
                   2443:   while (1)
                   2444:     {
                   2445:       if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF)
                   2446:        {
                   2447:          tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   2448: 
                   2449:          if (TREE_CODE (DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   2450:            /* ??? This case remains to be written.  */
                   2451:            abort ();
                   2452: 
                   2453:          *pbitpos += TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field));
                   2454:          if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
                   2455:            *pvolatilep = 1;
                   2456:        }
                   2457:       else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF)
                   2458:        {
                   2459:          if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   2460:            /* ??? This case remains to be written.  */
                   2461:            abort ();
                   2462: 
                   2463:          *pbitpos += TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
                   2464:          if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
                   2465:            *pvolatilep = 1;
                   2466:        }
                   2467:       else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ARRAY_REF
                   2468:               && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   2469:               && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST)
                   2470:        {
                   2471:          *pbitpos += (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   2472:                       * TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))));
                   2473:          if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
                   2474:            *pvolatilep = 1;
                   2475:        }
                   2476:       else if (TREE_CODE (exp) != NON_LVALUE_EXPR
                   2477:               && ! ((TREE_CODE (exp) == NOP_EXPR
                   2478:                      || TREE_CODE (exp) == CONVERT_EXPR)
                   2479:                     && (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp))
                   2480:                         == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))))
                   2481:        break;
                   2482:       exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   2483:     }
                   2484: 
                   2485:   /* If this was a bit-field, see if there is a mode that allows direct
                   2486:      access in case EXP is in memory.  */
                   2487:   if (mode == VOIDmode && *pbitpos % *pbitsize == 0)
                   2488:     {
                   2489:       mode = mode_for_size (*pbitsize, MODE_INT, 0);
                   2490:       if (mode == BLKmode)
                   2491:        mode = VOIDmode;
                   2492:     }
                   2493: 
                   2494:   *pmode = mode;
                   2495: 
                   2496:   return exp;
                   2497: }
                   2498: 
                   2499: /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications,
                   2500:    return an equivalent value that just refers to a register or memory.
                   2501:    This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic
                   2502:    and returning a pseudo-register containing the value.  */
                   2503: 
                   2504: rtx
                   2505: force_operand (value, target)
                   2506:      rtx value, target;
                   2507: {
                   2508:   register optab binoptab = 0;
                   2509:   /* Use a temporary to force order of execution of calls to
                   2510:      `force_operand'.  */
                   2511:   rtx tmp;
                   2512:   register rtx op2;
                   2513:   /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation.  */
                   2514:   register rtx subtarget = (target != 0 && GET_CODE (target) == REG ? target : 0);
                   2515: 
                   2516:   if (GET_CODE (value) == PLUS)
                   2517:     binoptab = add_optab;
                   2518:   else if (GET_CODE (value) == MINUS)
                   2519:     binoptab = sub_optab;
                   2520:   else if (GET_CODE (value) == MULT)
                   2521:     {
                   2522:       op2 = XEXP (value, 1);
                   2523:       if (!CONSTANT_P (op2)
                   2524:          && !(GET_CODE (op2) == REG && op2 != subtarget))
                   2525:        subtarget = 0;
                   2526:       tmp = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), subtarget);
                   2527:       return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value), tmp,
                   2528:                          force_operand (op2, 0),
                   2529:                          target, 0);
                   2530:     }
                   2531: 
                   2532:   if (binoptab)
                   2533:     {
                   2534:       op2 = XEXP (value, 1);
                   2535:       if (!CONSTANT_P (op2)
                   2536:          && !(GET_CODE (op2) == REG && op2 != subtarget))
                   2537:        subtarget = 0;
                   2538:       if (binoptab == sub_optab && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT)
                   2539:        {
                   2540:          binoptab = add_optab;
                   2541:          op2 = negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value), op2);
                   2542:        }
                   2543: 
                   2544:       /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
                   2545:         operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else.  In that
                   2546:         case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
                   2547:         constant first and then add the other value.  This allows virtual
                   2548:         register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
                   2549:         creating another one around this addition.  */
                   2550:       if (binoptab == add_optab && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
                   2551:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 0)) == PLUS
                   2552:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) == REG
                   2553:          && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
                   2554:          && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
                   2555:        {
                   2556:          rtx temp = expand_binop (GET_MODE (value), binoptab,
                   2557:                                   XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0), op2,
                   2558:                                   subtarget, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   2559:          return expand_binop (GET_MODE (value), binoptab, temp,
                   2560:                               force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 1), 0),
                   2561:                               target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   2562:        }
                   2563:                                   
                   2564:       tmp = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), subtarget);
                   2565:       return expand_binop (GET_MODE (value), binoptab, tmp,
                   2566:                           force_operand (op2, 0),
                   2567:                           target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   2568:       /* We give UNSIGNEP = 0 to expand_binop
                   2569:         because the only operations we are expanding here are signed ones.  */
                   2570:     }
                   2571:   return value;
                   2572: }
                   2573: 
                   2574: /* Subroutine of expand_expr:
                   2575:    save the non-copied parts (LIST) of an expr (LHS), and return a list
                   2576:    which can restore these values to their previous values,
                   2577:    should something modify their storage.  */
                   2578: 
                   2579: static tree
                   2580: save_noncopied_parts (lhs, list)
                   2581:      tree lhs;
                   2582:      tree list;
                   2583: {
                   2584:   tree tail;
                   2585:   tree parts = 0;
                   2586: 
                   2587:   for (tail = list; tail; tail = TREE_CHAIN (tail))
                   2588:     if (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (tail)) == TREE_LIST)
                   2589:       parts = chainon (parts, save_noncopied_parts (lhs, TREE_VALUE (tail)));
                   2590:     else
                   2591:       {
                   2592:        tree part = TREE_VALUE (tail);
                   2593:        tree part_type = TREE_TYPE (part);
                   2594:        tree to_be_saved = build (COMPONENT_REF, part_type, lhs, part, 0);
                   2595:        rtx target = assign_stack_temp (TYPE_MODE (part_type),
                   2596:                                        int_size_in_bytes (part_type), 0);
                   2597:        if (! memory_address_p (TYPE_MODE (part_type), XEXP (target, 0)))
                   2598:          target = change_address (target, TYPE_MODE (part_type), 0);
                   2599:        parts = tree_cons (to_be_saved,
                   2600:                           build (RTL_EXPR, part_type, 0, (tree) target),
                   2601:                           parts);
                   2602:        store_expr (TREE_PURPOSE (parts), RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_VALUE (parts)), 0);
                   2603:       }
                   2604:   return parts;
                   2605: }
                   2606: 
                   2607: /* Subroutine of expand_expr:
                   2608:    record the non-copied parts (LIST) of an expr (LHS), and return a list
                   2609:    which specifies the initial values of these parts.  */
                   2610: 
                   2611: static tree
                   2612: init_noncopied_parts (lhs, list)
                   2613:      tree lhs;
                   2614:      tree list;
                   2615: {
                   2616:   tree tail;
                   2617:   tree parts = 0;
                   2618: 
                   2619:   for (tail = list; tail; tail = TREE_CHAIN (tail))
                   2620:     if (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (tail)) == TREE_LIST)
                   2621:       parts = chainon (parts, init_noncopied_parts (lhs, TREE_VALUE (tail)));
                   2622:     else
                   2623:       {
                   2624:        tree part = TREE_VALUE (tail);
                   2625:        tree part_type = TREE_TYPE (part);
                   2626:        tree to_be_initialized = build (COMPONENT_REF, part_type, lhs, part, 0);
                   2627:        parts = tree_cons (TREE_PURPOSE (tail), to_be_initialized, parts);
                   2628:       }
                   2629:   return parts;
                   2630: }
                   2631: 
                   2632: /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
                   2633:    EXP can reference X, which is being modified.  */
                   2634: 
                   2635: static int
                   2636: safe_from_p (x, exp)
                   2637:      rtx x;
                   2638:      tree exp;
                   2639: {
                   2640:   rtx exp_rtl = 0;
                   2641:   int i, nops;
                   2642: 
                   2643:   if (x == 0)
                   2644:     return 1;
                   2645: 
                   2646:   /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
                   2647:      find the underlying pseudo.  */
                   2648:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
                   2649:     {
                   2650:       x = SUBREG_REG (x);
                   2651:       if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2652:        return 0;
                   2653:     }
                   2654: 
                   2655:   /* If X is a location in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe.  */
                   2656:   if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
                   2657:       && (XEXP (x, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
                   2658:          || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
                   2659:              && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
                   2660:     return 1;
                   2661: 
                   2662:   switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)))
                   2663:     {
                   2664:     case 'd':
                   2665:       exp_rtl = DECL_RTL (exp);
                   2666:       break;
                   2667: 
                   2668:     case 'c':
                   2669:       return 1;
                   2670: 
                   2671:     case 'x':
                   2672:       if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TREE_LIST)
                   2673:        return (safe_from_p (x, TREE_VALUE (exp))
                   2674:                && (TREE_CHAIN (exp) == 0
                   2675:                    || safe_from_p (x, TREE_CHAIN (exp))));
                   2676:       else
                   2677:        return 0;
                   2678: 
                   2679:     case '1':
                   2680:       return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   2681: 
                   2682:     case '2':
                   2683:     case '<':
                   2684:       return (safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   2685:              && safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)));
                   2686: 
                   2687:     case 'e':
                   2688:     case 'r':
                   2689:       /* Now do code-specific tests.  EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
                   2690:         the expression.  If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
                   2691:         both are in memory.  Otherwise, we check all operands of the
                   2692:         expression recursively.  */
                   2693: 
                   2694:       switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
                   2695:        {
                   2696:        case ADDR_EXPR:
                   2697:          return staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   2698: 
                   2699:        case INDIRECT_REF:
                   2700:          if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
                   2701:            return 0;
                   2702:          break;
                   2703: 
                   2704:        case CALL_EXPR:
                   2705:          exp_rtl = CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2706:          if (exp_rtl == 0)
                   2707:            {
                   2708:              /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
                   2709:                 all of memory.  */
                   2710:              if ((GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2711:                  || GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
                   2712:                return 0;
                   2713:            }
                   2714: 
                   2715:          break;
                   2716: 
                   2717:        case RTL_EXPR:
                   2718:          exp_rtl = RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2719:          if (exp_rtl == 0)
                   2720:            /* We don't know what this can modify.  */
                   2721:            return 0;
                   2722: 
                   2723:          break;
                   2724: 
                   2725:        case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
                   2726:          exp_rtl = RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2727:          break;
                   2728: 
                   2729:        case SAVE_EXPR:
                   2730:          exp_rtl = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2731:          break;
                   2732: 
                   2733:        case METHOD_CALL_EXPR:
                   2734:          /* This takes a rtx argument, but shouldn't appear here. */
                   2735:          abort ();
                   2736:        }
                   2737: 
                   2738:       /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands.  */
                   2739:       if (exp_rtl)
                   2740:        break;
                   2741: 
                   2742:       nops = tree_code_length[(int) TREE_CODE (exp)];
                   2743:       for (i = 0; i < nops; i++)
                   2744:        if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i) != 0
                   2745:            && ! safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, i)))
                   2746:          return 0;
                   2747:     }
                   2748: 
                   2749:   /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object.  Then see if we conflict
                   2750:      with it.  */
                   2751:   if (exp_rtl)
                   2752:     {
                   2753:       if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == SUBREG)
                   2754:        {
                   2755:          exp_rtl = SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl);
                   2756:          if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == REG
                   2757:              && REGNO (exp_rtl) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2758:            return 0;
                   2759:        }
                   2760: 
                   2761:       /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe.  Otherwise, it is unless both
                   2762:         are memory and EXP is not readonly.  */
                   2763:       return ! (rtx_equal_p (x, exp_rtl)
                   2764:                || (GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == MEM
                   2765:                    && ! TREE_READONLY (exp)));
                   2766:     }
                   2767: 
                   2768:   /* If we reach here, it is safe.  */
                   2769:   return 1;
                   2770: }
                   2771: 
                   2772: /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff EXP is an
                   2773:    expression whose type is statically determinable.  */
                   2774: 
                   2775: static int
                   2776: fixed_type_p (exp)
                   2777:      tree exp;
                   2778: {
                   2779:   if (TREE_CODE (exp) == PARM_DECL
                   2780:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == VAR_DECL
                   2781:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == CALL_EXPR || TREE_CODE (exp) == TARGET_EXPR
                   2782:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF
                   2783:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == ARRAY_REF)
                   2784:     return 1;
                   2785:   return 0;
                   2786: }
                   2787: 
                   2788: /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
                   2789:    An rtx for the computed value is returned.  The value is never null.
                   2790:    In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
                   2791: 
                   2792:    The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
                   2793:    TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
                   2794:    the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
                   2795: 
                   2796:    If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
                   2797: 
                   2798:    If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
                   2799:    result in mode TMODE.  But this is done only when convenient.
                   2800:    Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
                   2801:    TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
                   2802:    the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
                   2803: 
                   2804:    EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
                   2805:    with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
                   2806:    EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect.
                   2807: 
                   2808:    If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
                   2809:    we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
                   2810:    or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
                   2811:    products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
                   2812:    Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
                   2813:    and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
                   2814: 
                   2815:    EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
                   2816:    it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
                   2817:    This is used for outputting expressions used in intializers.  */
                   2818: 
                   2819: rtx
                   2820: expand_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier)
                   2821:      register tree exp;
                   2822:      rtx target;
                   2823:      enum machine_mode tmode;
                   2824:      enum expand_modifier modifier;
                   2825: {
                   2826:   register rtx op0, op1, temp;
                   2827:   tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
                   2828:   int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (type);
                   2829:   register enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
                   2830:   register enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (exp);
                   2831:   optab this_optab;
                   2832:   /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation.  */
                   2833:   rtx subtarget = (target != 0 && GET_CODE (target) == REG ? target : 0);
                   2834:   rtx original_target = target;
                   2835:   int ignore = target == const0_rtx;
                   2836:   tree context;
                   2837: 
                   2838:   /* Don't use hard regs as subtargets, because the combiner
                   2839:      can only handle pseudo regs.  */
                   2840:   if (subtarget && REGNO (subtarget) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2841:     subtarget = 0;
                   2842:   /* Avoid subtargets inside loops,
                   2843:      since they hide some invariant expressions.  */
                   2844:   if (preserve_subexpressions_p ())
                   2845:     subtarget = 0;
                   2846: 
                   2847:   if (ignore) target = 0, original_target = 0;
                   2848: 
                   2849:   /* If will do cse, generate all results into pseudo registers
                   2850:      since 1) that allows cse to find more things
                   2851:      and 2) otherwise cse could produce an insn the machine
                   2852:      cannot support.  */
                   2853: 
                   2854:   if (! cse_not_expected && mode != BLKmode && target
                   2855:       && (GET_CODE (target) != REG || REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   2856:     target = subtarget;
                   2857: 
                   2858:   /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored.  */
                   2859:   if (ignore && TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp)
                   2860:       && mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode)
                   2861:     {
                   2862:       target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   2863:       temp = expand_expr (exp, target, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   2864:       if (temp != target)
                   2865:        emit_move_insn (target, temp);
                   2866:       return target;
                   2867:     }
                   2868: 
                   2869:   switch (code)
                   2870:     {
                   2871:     case LABEL_DECL:
                   2872:       if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   2873:        forced_labels = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, VOIDmode,
                   2874:                                 label_rtx (exp), forced_labels);
                   2875:       return gen_rtx (MEM, FUNCTION_MODE,
                   2876:                      gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, label_rtx (exp)));
                   2877: 
                   2878:     case PARM_DECL:
                   2879:       if (DECL_RTL (exp) == 0)
                   2880:        {
                   2881:          error_with_decl (exp, "prior parameter's size depends on `%s'");
                   2882:          return const0_rtx;
                   2883:        }
                   2884: 
                   2885:     case FUNCTION_DECL:
                   2886:     case VAR_DECL:
                   2887:     case RESULT_DECL:
                   2888:       if (DECL_RTL (exp) == 0)
                   2889:        abort ();
                   2890:       /* Ensure variable marked as used
                   2891:         even if it doesn't go through a parser.  */
                   2892:       TREE_USED (exp) = 1;
                   2893:       /* Handle variables inherited from containing functions.  */
                   2894:       context = decl_function_context (exp);
                   2895: 
                   2896:       /* We treat inline_function_decl as an alias for the current function
                   2897:         because that is the inline function whose vars, types, etc.
                   2898:         are being merged into the current function.
                   2899:         See expand_inline_function.  */
                   2900:       if (context != 0 && context != current_function_decl
                   2901:          && context != inline_function_decl
                   2902:          /* If var is static, we don't need a static chain to access it.  */
                   2903:          && ! (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
                   2904:                && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0))))
                   2905:        {
                   2906:          rtx addr;
                   2907: 
                   2908:          /* Mark as non-local and addressable.  */
                   2909:          TREE_NONLOCAL (exp) = 1;
                   2910:          mark_addressable (exp);
                   2911:          if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) != MEM)
                   2912:            abort ();
                   2913:          addr = XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0);
                   2914:          if (GET_CODE (addr) == MEM)
                   2915:            addr = gen_rtx (MEM, Pmode, fix_lexical_addr (XEXP (addr, 0), exp));
                   2916:          else
                   2917:            addr = fix_lexical_addr (addr, exp);
                   2918:          return change_address (DECL_RTL (exp), mode, addr);
                   2919:        }
                   2920:       /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
                   2921:         from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
                   2922:         See expand_decl.  */
                   2923:       if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
                   2924:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0)) == REG)
                   2925:        return change_address (DECL_RTL (exp), GET_MODE (DECL_RTL (exp)),
                   2926:                               XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0));
                   2927:       if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
                   2928:          && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
                   2929:          && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
                   2930:          && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   2931:        {
                   2932:          /* DECL_RTL probably contains a constant address.
                   2933:             On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
                   2934:             make some insns to get that address into a register.  */
                   2935:          if (!memory_address_p (DECL_MODE (exp), XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0))
                   2936:              || (flag_force_addr
                   2937:                  && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0))))
                   2938:            return change_address (DECL_RTL (exp), VOIDmode,
                   2939:                                   copy_rtx (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0)));
                   2940:        }
                   2941:       return DECL_RTL (exp);
                   2942: 
                   2943:     case INTEGER_CST:
                   2944:       return immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp),
                   2945:                                 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp),
                   2946:                                 mode);
                   2947: 
                   2948:     case CONST_DECL:
                   2949:       return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   2950: 
                   2951:     case REAL_CST:
                   2952:       /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
                   2953:         which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary. 
                   2954:      
                   2955:         We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it.  But
                   2956:         this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
                   2957:         the constants.  It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
                   2958:         On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
                   2959:         many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
                   2960: 
                   2961:         Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate.  */
                   2962:       return immed_real_const (exp);
                   2963: 
                   2964:     case COMPLEX_CST:
                   2965:     case STRING_CST:
                   2966:       if (! TREE_CST_RTL (exp))
                   2967:        output_constant_def (exp);
                   2968: 
                   2969:       /* TREE_CST_RTL probably contains a constant address.
                   2970:         On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
                   2971:         make some insns to get that address into a register.  */
                   2972:       if (GET_CODE (TREE_CST_RTL (exp)) == MEM
                   2973:          && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
                   2974:          && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
                   2975:          && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
                   2976:          && !memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), 0)))
                   2977:        return change_address (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), VOIDmode,
                   2978:                               copy_rtx (XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), 0)));
                   2979:       return TREE_CST_RTL (exp);
                   2980: 
                   2981:     case SAVE_EXPR:
                   2982:       context = decl_function_context (exp);
                   2983:       /* We treat inline_function_decl as an alias for the current function
                   2984:         because that is the inline function whose vars, types, etc.
                   2985:         are being merged into the current function.
                   2986:         See expand_inline_function.  */
                   2987:       if (context == current_function_decl || context == inline_function_decl)
                   2988:        context = 0;
                   2989: 
                   2990:       /* If this is non-local, handle it.  */
                   2991:       if (context)
                   2992:        {
                   2993:          temp = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2994:          if (temp && GET_CODE (temp) == REG)
                   2995:            {
                   2996:              put_var_into_stack (exp);
                   2997:              temp = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2998:            }
                   2999:          if (temp == 0 || GET_CODE (temp) != MEM)
                   3000:            abort ();
                   3001:          return change_address (temp, mode,
                   3002:                                 fix_lexical_addr (XEXP (temp, 0), exp));
                   3003:        }
                   3004:       if (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp) == 0)
                   3005:        {
                   3006:          if (mode == BLKmode)
                   3007:            temp
                   3008:              = assign_stack_temp (mode,
                   3009:                                   int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)), 0);
                   3010:          else
                   3011:            temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3012:          SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp) = temp;
                   3013:          store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), temp, 0);
                   3014:          if (!optimize && GET_CODE (temp) == REG)
                   3015:            save_expr_regs = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, VOIDmode, temp,
                   3016:                                      save_expr_regs);
                   3017:        }
                   3018:       return SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3019: 
                   3020:     case EXIT_EXPR:
                   3021:       /* Exit the current loop if the body-expression is true.  */
                   3022:       {
                   3023:        rtx label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3024:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), label, 0);
                   3025:        expand_exit_loop (0);
                   3026:        emit_label (label);
                   3027:       }
                   3028:       return const0_rtx;
                   3029: 
                   3030:     case LOOP_EXPR:
                   3031:       expand_start_loop (1);
                   3032:       expand_expr_stmt (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   3033:       expand_end_loop ();
                   3034: 
                   3035:       return const0_rtx;
                   3036: 
                   3037:     case BIND_EXPR:
                   3038:       {
                   3039:        tree vars = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   3040:        int vars_need_expansion = 0;
                   3041: 
                   3042:        /* Need to open a binding contour here because
                   3043:           if there are any cleanups they most be contained here.  */
                   3044:        expand_start_bindings (0);
                   3045: 
                   3046:        /* Mark the corresponding BLOCK for output.  */
                   3047:        if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) != 0)
                   3048:          TREE_USED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) = 1;
                   3049: 
                   3050:        /* If VARS have not yet been expanded, expand them now.  */
                   3051:        while (vars)
                   3052:          {
                   3053:            if (DECL_RTL (vars) == 0)
                   3054:              {
                   3055:                vars_need_expansion = 1;
                   3056:                expand_decl (vars);
                   3057:              }
                   3058:            expand_decl_init (vars);
                   3059:            vars = TREE_CHAIN (vars);
                   3060:          }
                   3061: 
                   3062:        temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, tmode, modifier);
                   3063: 
                   3064:        expand_end_bindings (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, 0);
                   3065: 
                   3066:        return temp;
                   3067:       }
                   3068: 
                   3069:     case RTL_EXPR:
                   3070:       if (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp) == const0_rtx)
                   3071:        abort ();
                   3072:       emit_insns (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp));
                   3073:       RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp) = const0_rtx;
                   3074:       return RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3075: 
                   3076:     case CONSTRUCTOR:
                   3077:       /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory.  */
                   3078:       if (TREE_STATIC (exp))
                   3079:        /* For aggregate types with non-BLKmode modes,
                   3080:           this should ideally construct a CONST_INT.  */
                   3081:        {
                   3082:          rtx constructor = output_constant_def (exp);
                   3083:          if (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (constructor),
                   3084:                                  XEXP (constructor, 0)))
                   3085:            constructor = change_address (constructor, VOIDmode,
                   3086:                                          XEXP (constructor, 0));
                   3087:          return constructor;
                   3088:        }
                   3089: 
                   3090:       if (ignore)
                   3091:        {
                   3092:          tree elt;
                   3093:          for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp); elt; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
                   3094:            expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (elt), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3095:          return const0_rtx;
                   3096:        }
                   3097:       else
                   3098:        {
                   3099:          if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp))
                   3100:            {
                   3101:              if (mode != BLKmode && ! TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp))
                   3102:                target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3103:              else
                   3104:                {
                   3105:                  rtx safe_target = assign_stack_temp (mode, int_size_in_bytes (type), 0);
                   3106:                  if (target)
                   3107:                    MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (safe_target) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (target);
                   3108:                  target = safe_target;
                   3109:                }
                   3110:            }
                   3111:          store_constructor (exp, target);
                   3112:          return target;
                   3113:        }
                   3114: 
                   3115:     case INDIRECT_REF:
                   3116:       {
                   3117:        tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   3118:        tree exp2;
                   3119: 
                   3120:        /* A SAVE_EXPR as the address in an INDIRECT_EXPR is generated
                   3121:           for  *PTR += ANYTHING  where PTR is put inside the SAVE_EXPR.
                   3122:           This code has the same general effect as simply doing
                   3123:           expand_expr on the save expr, except that the expression PTR
                   3124:           is computed for use as a memory address.  This means different
                   3125:           code, suitable for indexing, may be generated.  */
                   3126:        if (TREE_CODE (exp1) == SAVE_EXPR
                   3127:            && SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp1) == 0
                   3128:            && TREE_CODE (exp2 = TREE_OPERAND (exp1, 0)) != ERROR_MARK
                   3129:            && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1)) == Pmode
                   3130:            && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp2)) == Pmode)
                   3131:          {
                   3132:            temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp1, 0), 0, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3133:            op0 = memory_address (mode, temp);
                   3134:            op0 = copy_all_regs (op0);
                   3135:            SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp1) = op0;
                   3136:          }
                   3137:        else
                   3138:          {
                   3139:            op0 = expand_expr (exp1, 0, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3140:            op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
                   3141:          }
                   3142:       }
                   3143:       temp = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, op0);
                   3144:       /* If address was computed by addition,
                   3145:         mark this as an element of an aggregate.  */
                   3146:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
                   3147:          || (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == SAVE_EXPR
                   3148:              && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) == PLUS_EXPR)
                   3149:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == ARRAY_TYPE
                   3150:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == RECORD_TYPE
                   3151:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == UNION_TYPE)
                   3152:        MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (temp) = 1;
                   3153:       MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp) = TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp) || flag_volatile;
                   3154: #if 0 /* It is incorrectto set RTX_UNCHANGING_P here, because the fact that
                   3155:         a location is accessed through a pointer to const does not mean
                   3156:         that the value there can never change.  */
                   3157:       RTX_UNCHANGING_P (temp) = TREE_READONLY (exp);
                   3158: #endif
                   3159:       return temp;
                   3160: 
                   3161:     case ARRAY_REF:
                   3162:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != INTEGER_CST
                   3163:          || TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   3164:        {
                   3165:          /* Nonconstant array index or nonconstant element size.
                   3166:             Generate the tree for *(&array+index) and expand that,
                   3167:             except do it in a language-independent way
                   3168:             and don't complain about non-lvalue arrays.
                   3169:             `mark_addressable' should already have been called
                   3170:             for any array for which this case will be reached.  */
                   3171: 
                   3172:          /* Don't forget the const or volatile flag from the array element. */
                   3173:          tree variant_type = build_type_variant (type,
                   3174:                                                  TREE_READONLY (exp),
                   3175:                                                  TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp));
                   3176:          tree array_adr = build1 (ADDR_EXPR, build_pointer_type (variant_type),
                   3177:                                   TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   3178:          tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   3179:          tree elt;
                   3180: 
                   3181:          /* Convert the integer argument to a type the same size as a pointer
                   3182:             so the multiply won't overflow spuriously.  */
                   3183:          if (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (index)) != POINTER_SIZE)
                   3184:            index = convert (type_for_size (POINTER_SIZE, 0), index);
                   3185: 
                   3186:          /* Don't think the address has side effects
                   3187:             just because the array does.
                   3188:             (In some cases the address might have side effects,
                   3189:             and we fail to record that fact here.  However, it should not
                   3190:             matter, since expand_expr should not care.)  */
                   3191:          TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array_adr) = 0;
                   3192: 
                   3193:          elt = build1 (INDIRECT_REF, type,
                   3194:                        fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, TYPE_POINTER_TO (variant_type),
                   3195:                                     array_adr,
                   3196:                                     fold (build (MULT_EXPR,
                   3197:                                                  TYPE_POINTER_TO (variant_type),
                   3198:                                                  index, size_in_bytes (type))))));
                   3199: 
                   3200:          /* Volatility, etc., of new expression is same as old expression.  */
                   3201:          TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (elt) = TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp);
                   3202:          TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (elt) = TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp);
                   3203:          TREE_READONLY (elt) = TREE_READONLY (exp);
                   3204: 
                   3205:          return expand_expr (elt, target, tmode, modifier);
                   3206:        }
                   3207: 
                   3208:       /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
                   3209:         This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.  */
                   3210:       {
                   3211:        int i;
                   3212:        tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   3213:        tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   3214: 
                   3215:        if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == STRING_CST
                   3216:            && TREE_CODE (arg1) == INTEGER_CST
                   3217:            && !TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (arg1)
                   3218:            && (i = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (arg1)) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (arg0))
                   3219:          {
                   3220:            if (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0)) == integer_type_node)
                   3221:              {
                   3222:                exp = build_int_2 (((int *)TREE_STRING_POINTER (arg0))[i], 0);
                   3223:                TREE_TYPE (exp) = integer_type_node;
                   3224:                return expand_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier);
                   3225:              }
                   3226:            if (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0)) == char_type_node)
                   3227:              {
                   3228:                exp = build_int_2 (TREE_STRING_POINTER (arg0)[i], 0);
                   3229:                TREE_TYPE (exp) = integer_type_node;
                   3230:                return expand_expr (convert (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0)), exp), target, tmode, modifier);
                   3231:              }
                   3232:          }
                   3233:       }
                   3234: 
                   3235:       /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
                   3236:         just get the value from the array.  */
                   3237:       if (TREE_READONLY (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3238:          && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3239:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == ARRAY_TYPE
                   3240:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == VAR_DECL
                   3241:          && DECL_INITIAL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3242:          && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) != ERROR_MARK)
                   3243:        {
                   3244:          tree index = fold (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   3245:          if (TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST)
                   3246:            {
                   3247:              int i = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index);
                   3248:              tree init = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (DECL_INITIAL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   3249: 
                   3250:              while (init && i--)
                   3251:                init = TREE_CHAIN (init);
                   3252:              if (init)
                   3253:                return expand_expr (fold (TREE_VALUE (init)), target, tmode, modifier);
                   3254:            }
                   3255:        }
                   3256:       /* Treat array-ref with constant index as a component-ref.  */
                   3257: 
                   3258:     case COMPONENT_REF:
                   3259:     case BIT_FIELD_REF:
                   3260:       {
                   3261:        enum machine_mode mode1;
                   3262:        int bitsize;
                   3263:        int bitpos;
                   3264:        int volatilep = 0;
                   3265:        tree tem = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos,
                   3266:                                        &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep);
                   3267: 
                   3268:        /* In some cases, we will be offsetting OP0's address by a constant.
                   3269:           So get it as a sum, if possible.  If we will be using it
                   3270:           directly in an insn, we validate it.  */
                   3271:        op0 = expand_expr (tem, 0, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3272: 
                   3273:        /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield.  */
                   3274:        if (GET_CODE (op0) == MEM && volatilep && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0))
                   3275:          {
                   3276:            op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
                   3277:            MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) = 1;
                   3278:          }
                   3279: 
                   3280:        if (mode1 == VOIDmode
                   3281:            || GET_CODE (op0) == REG || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
                   3282:          {
                   3283:            /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
                   3284:               as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
                   3285:               an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object.  Handle this case
                   3286:               by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
                   3287:               (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
                   3288:               storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode.  */
                   3289:            enum machine_mode ext_mode = mode;
                   3290: 
                   3291:            if (ext_mode == BLKmode)
                   3292:              ext_mode = mode_for_size (bitsize, MODE_INT, 1);
                   3293: 
                   3294:            if (ext_mode == BLKmode)
                   3295:              abort ();
                   3296: 
                   3297:            op0 = extract_bit_field (validize_mem (op0), bitsize, bitpos,
                   3298:                                     unsignedp, target, ext_mode, ext_mode,
                   3299:                                     TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem)) / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                   3300:                                     int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (tem)));
                   3301:            if (mode == BLKmode)
                   3302:              {
                   3303:                rtx new = assign_stack_temp (ext_mode,
                   3304:                                             bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT, 0);
                   3305: 
                   3306:                emit_move_insn (new, op0);
                   3307:                op0 = copy_rtx (new);
                   3308:                PUT_MODE (op0, BLKmode);
                   3309:              }
                   3310: 
                   3311:            return op0;
                   3312:          }
                   3313: 
                   3314:        /* Get a reference to just this component.  */
                   3315:        if (modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
                   3316:            || modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3317:          op0 = gen_rtx (MEM, mode1, plus_constant (XEXP (op0, 0),
                   3318:                                                    (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT)));
                   3319:        else
                   3320:          op0 = change_address (op0, mode1,
                   3321:                                plus_constant (XEXP (op0, 0),
                   3322:                                               (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT)));
                   3323:        MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (op0) = 1;
                   3324:        MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) |= volatilep;
                   3325:        if (mode == mode1 || mode1 == BLKmode || mode1 == tmode)
                   3326:          return op0;
                   3327:        if (target == 0)
                   3328:          target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
                   3329:        convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp);
                   3330:        return target;
                   3331:       }
                   3332: 
                   3333:     case OFFSET_REF:
                   3334:       {
                   3335:        tree base = build_unary_op (ADDR_EXPR, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
                   3336:        tree addr = build (PLUS_EXPR, type, base, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   3337:        op0 = expand_expr (addr, 0, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3338:        temp = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, memory_address (mode, op0));
                   3339:        MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (temp) = 1;
                   3340:        MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp) = TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp) || flag_volatile;
                   3341: #if 0 /* It is incorrectto set RTX_UNCHANGING_P here, because the fact that
                   3342:         a location is accessed through a pointer to const does not mean
                   3343:         that the value there can never change.  */
                   3344:        RTX_UNCHANGING_P (temp) = TREE_READONLY (exp);
                   3345: #endif
                   3346:        return temp;
                   3347:       }
                   3348: 
                   3349:       /* Intended for a reference to a buffer of a file-object in Pascal.
                   3350:         But it's not certain that a special tree code will really be
                   3351:         necessary for these.  INDIRECT_REF might work for them.  */
                   3352:     case BUFFER_REF:
                   3353:       abort ();
                   3354: 
                   3355:     case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
                   3356:       if (RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp) == 0)
                   3357:        {
                   3358:          RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp)
                   3359:            = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, modifier);
                   3360:          cleanups_this_call = tree_cons (0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), cleanups_this_call);
                   3361:          /* That's it for this cleanup.  */
                   3362:          TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) = 0;
                   3363:        }
                   3364:       return RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3365: 
                   3366:     case CALL_EXPR:
                   3367:       /* Check for a built-in function.  */
                   3368:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
                   3369:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) == FUNCTION_DECL
                   3370:          && DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   3371:        return expand_builtin (exp, target, subtarget, tmode, ignore);
                   3372:       /* If this call was expanded already by preexpand_calls,
                   3373:         just return the result we got.  */
                   3374:       if (CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp) != 0)
                   3375:        return CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3376:       return expand_call (exp, target, ignore, modifier);
                   3377: 
                   3378:     case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
                   3379:     case NOP_EXPR:
                   3380:     case CONVERT_EXPR:
                   3381:     case REFERENCE_EXPR:
                   3382:       if (TREE_CODE (type) == VOID_TYPE || ignore)
                   3383:        {
                   3384:          expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3385:          return const0_rtx;
                   3386:        }
                   3387:       if (mode == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   3388:        return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3389:       if (TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
                   3390:        {
                   3391:          tree valtype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   3392:          if (target == 0)
                   3393:            {
                   3394:              if (mode == BLKmode)
                   3395:                {
                   3396:                  if (TYPE_SIZE (type) == 0
                   3397:                      || TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   3398:                    abort ();
                   3399:                  target = assign_stack_temp (BLKmode,
                   3400:                                              (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (type))
                   3401:                                               + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
                   3402:                                              / BITS_PER_UNIT, 0);
                   3403:                }
                   3404:              else
                   3405:                target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3406:            }
                   3407:          if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM)
                   3408:            /* Store data into beginning of memory target.  */
                   3409:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   3410:                        change_address (target, TYPE_MODE (valtype), 0), 0);
                   3411:          else if (GET_CODE (target) == REG)
                   3412:            /* Store this field into a union of the proper type.  */
                   3413:            store_field (target, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (valtype)), 0,
                   3414:                         TYPE_MODE (valtype), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   3415:                         VOIDmode, 0, 1,
                   3416:                         int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
                   3417:          else
                   3418:            abort ();
                   3419: 
                   3420:          /* Return the entire union.  */
                   3421:          return target;
                   3422:        }
                   3423:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, mode, 0);
                   3424:       if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode || GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode)
                   3425:        return op0;
                   3426:       if (flag_force_mem && GET_CODE (op0) == MEM)
                   3427:        op0 = copy_to_reg (op0);
                   3428: 
                   3429:       if (target == 0)
                   3430:        return convert_to_mode (mode, op0, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
                   3431:       else
                   3432:        convert_move (target, op0, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
                   3433:       return target;
                   3434: 
                   3435:     case PLUS_EXPR:
                   3436:       /* We come here from MINUS_EXPR when the second operand is a constant. */
                   3437:     plus_expr:
                   3438:       this_optab = add_optab;
                   3439: 
                   3440:       /* If we are adding a constant, an RTL_EXPR that is sp, fp, or ap, and
                   3441:         something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
                   3442:         then to the other thing.  This case can occur during strength
                   3443:         reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
                   3444:         frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
                   3445: 
                   3446:         fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
                   3447:         PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
                   3448:         sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
                   3449:         the innermost first argument and our second argument.  */
                   3450: 
                   3451:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
                   3452:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3453:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == RTL_EXPR
                   3454:          && (RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == frame_pointer_rtx
                   3455:              || RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == stack_pointer_rtx
                   3456:              || RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == arg_pointer_rtx))
                   3457:        {
                   3458:          tree t = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   3459: 
                   3460:          TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
                   3461:          TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0) = t;
                   3462:        }
                   3463: 
                   3464:       /* If the result is to be Pmode and we are adding an integer to
                   3465:         something, we might be forming a constant.  So try to use
                   3466:         plus_constant.  If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
                   3467:         use force_operand.  This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
                   3468:         efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
                   3469:         address.
                   3470: 
                   3471:         If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum.  */
                   3472:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3473:          && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3474:          && (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
                   3475:              || mode == Pmode))
                   3476:        {
                   3477:          op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), subtarget, VOIDmode,
                   3478:                             EXPAND_SUM);
                   3479:          op1 = plus_constant (op1, TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   3480:          if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3481:            op1 = force_operand (op1, target);
                   3482:          return op1;
                   3483:        }
                   3484: 
                   3485:       else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3486:               && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3487:               && (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
                   3488:                   || mode == Pmode))
                   3489:        {
                   3490:          op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode,
                   3491:                             EXPAND_SUM);
                   3492:          op0 = plus_constant (op0, TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)));
                   3493:          if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3494:            op0 = force_operand (op0, target);
                   3495:          return op0;
                   3496:        }
                   3497: 
                   3498:       /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
                   3499:         if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
                   3500:         And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
                   3501:         zero-extend.  */
                   3502:       if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3503:          || mode != Pmode) goto binop;
                   3504: 
                   3505:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3506:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3507:        subtarget = 0;
                   3508: 
                   3509:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3510:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3511:       /* Put a sum last, to simplify what follows.  */
                   3512: #ifdef OLD_INDEXING
                   3513:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == MULT)
                   3514:        {
                   3515:          temp = op0;
                   3516:          op0 = op1;
                   3517:          op1 = temp;
                   3518:        }
                   3519: #endif
                   3520: #ifndef OLD_INDEXING
                   3521:       /* Make sure any term that's a sum with a constant comes last.  */
                   3522:       if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3523:          && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1)))
                   3524:        {
                   3525:          temp = op0;
                   3526:          op0 = op1;
                   3527:          op1 = temp;
                   3528:        }
                   3529:       /* If adding to a sum including a constant,
                   3530:         associate it to put the constant outside.  */
                   3531:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
                   3532:          && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op1, 1)))
                   3533:        {
                   3534:          rtx tem;
                   3535:          int constant_term = 0;
                   3536: 
                   3537:          op0 = gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, XEXP (op1, 0), op0);
                   3538:          /* Let's also eliminate constants from op0 if possible.  */
                   3539:          tem = eliminate_constant_term (op0, &constant_term);
                   3540:          if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   3541:            {
                   3542:              if (constant_term != 0)
                   3543:                return plus_constant (tem, INTVAL (XEXP (op1, 1)) + constant_term);
                   3544:              else
                   3545:                return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (XEXP (op1, 1)));
                   3546:            }
                   3547:          else
                   3548:            return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 1));
                   3549:        }
                   3550: #endif
                   3551:       /* Put a constant term last.  */
                   3552:       if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
                   3553:        return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op1, op0);
                   3554:       else
                   3555:        return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, op1);
                   3556: 
                   3557:     case MINUS_EXPR:
                   3558:       /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
                   3559:         for the sake of an initializer.  */
                   3560:       if ((modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3561:          && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3562:          && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3563:        {
                   3564:          rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3565:          rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3566:          return gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op0, op1);
                   3567:        }
                   3568:       /* Convert A - const to A + (-const).  */
                   3569:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
                   3570:        {
                   3571:          exp = build (PLUS_EXPR, type, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   3572:                       fold (build1 (NEGATE_EXPR, type,
                   3573:                                     TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
                   3574:          goto plus_expr;
                   3575:        }
                   3576:       this_optab = sub_optab;
                   3577:       goto binop;
                   3578: 
                   3579:     case MULT_EXPR:
                   3580:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3581:       /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
                   3582:         Thus the following special case checks need only
                   3583:         check the second operand.  */
                   3584:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST)
                   3585:        {
                   3586:          register tree t1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   3587:          TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   3588:          TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = t1;
                   3589:        }
                   3590: 
                   3591:       /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
                   3592:         indexed address, for machines that support that.  */
                   3593: 
                   3594:       if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM && mode == Pmode
                   3595:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3596:          && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   3597:        {
                   3598:          op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3599: 
                   3600:          /* Apply distributive law if OP0 is x+c.  */
                   3601:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3602:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   3603:            return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode,
                   3604:                            gen_rtx (MULT, mode, XEXP (op0, 0),
                   3605:                                     gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   3606:                                              TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))),
                   3607:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   3608:                                     (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   3609:                                      * INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))));
                   3610: 
                   3611:          if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
                   3612:            op0 = force_operand (op0, 0);
                   3613:          if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
                   3614:            op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op0);
                   3615: 
                   3616:          return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
                   3617:                          gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   3618:                                   TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
                   3619:        }
                   3620: 
                   3621:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3622:        subtarget = 0;
                   3623: 
                   3624:       /* Check for multiplying things that have been extended
                   3625:         from a narrower type.  If this machine supports multiplying
                   3626:         in that narrower type with a result in the desired type,
                   3627:         do it that way, and avoid the explicit type-conversion.  */
                   3628:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == NOP_EXPR
                   3629:          && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
                   3630:          && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   3631:              < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   3632:          && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3633:               && int_fits_type_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   3634:                                   TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   3635:               /* Don't use a widening multiply if a shift will do.  */
                   3636:               && ((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))))
                   3637:                    > HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   3638:                   || exact_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) < 0))
                   3639:              ||
                   3640:              (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == NOP_EXPR
                   3641:               && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
                   3642:                   ==
                   3643:                   TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))))
                   3644:               /* If both operands are extended, they must either both
                   3645:                  be zero-extended or both be sign-extended.  */
                   3646:               && (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
                   3647:                   ==
                   3648:                   TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))))))
                   3649:        {
                   3650:          enum machine_mode innermode
                   3651:            = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)));
                   3652:          this_optab = (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   3653:                        ? umul_widen_optab : smul_widen_optab);
                   3654:          if (mode == GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (innermode)
                   3655:              && this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                   3656:            {
                   3657:              op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
                   3658:                                 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3659:              if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
                   3660:                op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3661:              else
                   3662:                op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0),
                   3663:                                   0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3664:              goto binop2;
                   3665:            }
                   3666:        }
                   3667:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3668:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3669:       return expand_mult (mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
                   3670: 
                   3671:     case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR:
                   3672:     case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR:
                   3673:     case CEIL_DIV_EXPR:
                   3674:     case ROUND_DIV_EXPR:
                   3675:     case EXACT_DIV_EXPR:
                   3676:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3677:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3678:        subtarget = 0;
                   3679:       /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
                   3680:         then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
                   3681:         where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it.  */
                   3682:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3683:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3684:       return expand_divmod (0, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
                   3685: 
                   3686:     case RDIV_EXPR:
                   3687:       this_optab = flodiv_optab;
                   3688:       goto binop;
                   3689: 
                   3690:     case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR:
                   3691:     case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR:
                   3692:     case CEIL_MOD_EXPR:
                   3693:     case ROUND_MOD_EXPR:
                   3694:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3695:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3696:        subtarget = 0;
                   3697:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3698:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3699:       return expand_divmod (1, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
                   3700: 
                   3701:     case FIX_ROUND_EXPR:
                   3702:     case FIX_FLOOR_EXPR:
                   3703:     case FIX_CEIL_EXPR:
                   3704:       abort ();                        /* Not used for C.  */
                   3705: 
                   3706:     case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR:
                   3707:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3708:       if (target == 0)
                   3709:        target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3710:       expand_fix (target, op0, unsignedp);
                   3711:       return target;
                   3712: 
                   3713:     case FLOAT_EXPR:
                   3714:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3715:       if (target == 0)
                   3716:        target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3717:       /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
                   3718:         So give it the correct mode.  With -O, cse will optimize this.  */
                   3719:       if (GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode)
                   3720:        op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))),
                   3721:                                op0);
                   3722:       expand_float (target, op0,
                   3723:                    TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
                   3724:       return target;
                   3725: 
                   3726:     case NEGATE_EXPR:
                   3727:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3728:       temp = expand_unop (mode, neg_optab, op0, target, 0);
                   3729:       if (temp == 0)
                   3730:        abort ();
                   3731:       return temp;
                   3732: 
                   3733:     case ABS_EXPR:
                   3734:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3735: 
                   3736:       /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand.  Testing here means we don't
                   3737:         risk generating incorrect code below.  */
                   3738:       if (TREE_UNSIGNED (type))
                   3739:        return op0;
                   3740: 
                   3741:       /* First try to do it with a special abs instruction.  */
                   3742:       temp = expand_unop (mode, abs_optab, op0, target, 0);
                   3743:       if (temp != 0)
                   3744:        return temp;
                   3745: 
                   3746:       /* If this machine has expensive jumps, we can do integer absolute
                   3747:         value of X as (((signed) x >> (W-1)) ^ x) - ((signed) x >> (W-1)),
                   3748:         where W is the width of MODE.  */
                   3749: 
                   3750:       if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT && BRANCH_COST >= 2)
                   3751:        {
                   3752:          rtx extended = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, mode, op0,
                   3753:                                       size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1),
                   3754:                                       0, 0);
                   3755: 
                   3756:          temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, extended, op0, target, 0,
                   3757:                               OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   3758:          if (temp != 0)
                   3759:            temp = expand_binop (mode, sub_optab, temp, extended, target, 0,
                   3760:                                 OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   3761: 
                   3762:          if (temp != 0)
                   3763:            return temp;
                   3764:        }
                   3765: 
                   3766:       /* If that does not win, use conditional jump and negate.  */
                   3767:       target = original_target;
                   3768:       temp = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3769:       if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3770:          || (GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   3771:              && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   3772:        target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3773:       emit_move_insn (target, op0);
                   3774:       emit_cmp_insn (target,
                   3775:                     expand_expr (convert (type, integer_zero_node),
                   3776:                                  0, VOIDmode, 0),
                   3777:                     GE, 0, mode, 0, 0);
                   3778:       NO_DEFER_POP;
                   3779:       emit_jump_insn (gen_bge (temp));
                   3780:       op0 = expand_unop (mode, neg_optab, target, target, 0);
                   3781:       if (op0 != target)
                   3782:        emit_move_insn (target, op0);
                   3783:       emit_label (temp);
                   3784:       OK_DEFER_POP;
                   3785:       return target;
                   3786: 
                   3787:     case MAX_EXPR:
                   3788:     case MIN_EXPR:
                   3789:       target = original_target;
                   3790:       if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   3791:          || (GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   3792:              && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   3793:        target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3794:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3795:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3796: 
                   3797:       /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
                   3798:         If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
                   3799:         value.  */
                   3800:       this_optab = (TREE_UNSIGNED (type)
                   3801:                    ? (code == MIN_EXPR ? umin_optab : umax_optab)
                   3802:                    : (code == MIN_EXPR ? smin_optab : smax_optab));
                   3803: 
                   3804:       temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
                   3805:                           OPTAB_WIDEN);
                   3806:       if (temp != 0)
                   3807:        return temp;
                   3808: 
                   3809:       if (target != op0)
                   3810:        emit_move_insn (target, op0);
                   3811:       op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3812:       if (code == MAX_EXPR)
                   3813:        temp = (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3814:                ? compare_from_rtx (target, op1, GEU, 1, mode, 0, 0)
                   3815:                : compare_from_rtx (target, op1, GE, 0, mode, 0, 0));
                   3816:       else
                   3817:        temp = (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3818:                ? compare_from_rtx (target, op1, LEU, 1, mode, 0, 0)
                   3819:                : compare_from_rtx (target, op1, LE, 0, mode, 0, 0));
                   3820:       if (temp == const0_rtx)
                   3821:        emit_move_insn (target, op1);
                   3822:       else if (temp != const_true_rtx)
                   3823:        {
                   3824:          if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (temp)] != 0)
                   3825:            emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (temp)]) (op0));
                   3826:          else
                   3827:            abort ();
                   3828:          emit_move_insn (target, op1);
                   3829:        }
                   3830:       emit_label (op0);
                   3831:       return target;
                   3832: 
                   3833: /* ??? Can optimize when the operand of this is a bitwise operation,
                   3834:    by using a different bitwise operation.  */
                   3835:     case BIT_NOT_EXPR:
                   3836:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3837:       temp = expand_unop (mode, one_cmpl_optab, op0, target, 1);
                   3838:       if (temp == 0)
                   3839:        abort ();
                   3840:       return temp;
                   3841: 
                   3842:     case FFS_EXPR:
                   3843:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3844:       temp = expand_unop (mode, ffs_optab, op0, target, 1);
                   3845:       if (temp == 0)
                   3846:        abort ();
                   3847:       return temp;
                   3848: 
                   3849: /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
                   3850:    Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
                   3851:    and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
                   3852:    but that is probably not worth while.  */
                   3853: 
                   3854: /* BIT_AND_EXPR is for bitwise anding.
                   3855:    TRUTH_AND_EXPR is for anding two boolean values
                   3856:    when we want in all cases to compute both of them.
                   3857:    In general it is fastest to do TRUTH_AND_EXPR by
                   3858:    computing both operands as actual zero-or-1 values
                   3859:    and then bitwise anding.  In cases where there cannot
                   3860:    be any side effects, better code would be made by
                   3861:    treating TRUTH_AND_EXPR like TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR;
                   3862:    but the question is how to recognize those cases.  */
                   3863: 
                   3864:     case TRUTH_AND_EXPR:
                   3865:     case BIT_AND_EXPR:
                   3866:       this_optab = and_optab;
                   3867:       goto binop;
                   3868: 
                   3869: /* See comment above about TRUTH_AND_EXPR; it applies here too.  */
                   3870:     case TRUTH_OR_EXPR:
                   3871:     case BIT_IOR_EXPR:
                   3872:       this_optab = ior_optab;
                   3873:       goto binop;
                   3874: 
                   3875:     case BIT_XOR_EXPR:
                   3876:       this_optab = xor_optab;
                   3877:       goto binop;
                   3878: 
                   3879:     case LSHIFT_EXPR:
                   3880:     case RSHIFT_EXPR:
                   3881:     case LROTATE_EXPR:
                   3882:     case RROTATE_EXPR:
                   3883:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3884:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3885:        subtarget = 0;
                   3886:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3887:       return expand_shift (code, mode, op0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target,
                   3888:                           unsignedp);
                   3889: 
                   3890: /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ.
                   3891:    Also, the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition.  */
                   3892:     case LT_EXPR:
                   3893:     case LE_EXPR:
                   3894:     case GT_EXPR:
                   3895:     case GE_EXPR:
                   3896:     case EQ_EXPR:
                   3897:     case NE_EXPR:
                   3898:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3899:       temp = do_store_flag (exp, target, tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode, 0);
                   3900:       if (temp != 0)
                   3901:        return temp;
                   3902:       /* For foo != 0, load foo, and if it is nonzero load 1 instead. */
                   3903:       if (code == NE_EXPR && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   3904:          && original_target
                   3905:          && GET_CODE (original_target) == REG
                   3906:          && (GET_MODE (original_target)
                   3907:              == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   3908:        {
                   3909:          temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3910:          if (temp != original_target)
                   3911:            temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
                   3912:          op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3913:          emit_cmp_insn (temp, const0_rtx, EQ, 0,
                   3914:                         GET_MODE (temp), unsignedp, 0);
                   3915:          emit_jump_insn (gen_beq (op1));
                   3916:          emit_move_insn (temp, const1_rtx);
                   3917:          emit_label (op1);
                   3918:          return temp;
                   3919:        }
                   3920:       /* If no set-flag instruction, must generate a conditional
                   3921:         store into a temporary variable.  Drop through
                   3922:         and handle this like && and ||.  */
                   3923: 
                   3924:     case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
                   3925:     case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
                   3926:       if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp)
                   3927:          /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
                   3928:             value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing.  */
                   3929:          || (!optimize && GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   3930:              && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   3931:        target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
                   3932:       emit_clr_insn (target);
                   3933:       op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3934:       jumpifnot (exp, op1);
                   3935:       emit_0_to_1_insn (target);
                   3936:       emit_label (op1);
                   3937:       return target;
                   3938: 
                   3939:     case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR:
                   3940:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3941:       /* The parser is careful to generate TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
                   3942:         only with operands that are always zero or one.  */
                   3943:       temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0,
                   3944:                           gen_rtx (CONST_INT, mode, 1),
                   3945:                           target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   3946:       if (temp == 0)
                   3947:        abort ();
                   3948:       return temp;
                   3949: 
                   3950:     case COMPOUND_EXPR:
                   3951:       expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3952:       emit_queue ();
                   3953:       return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   3954:                          (ignore ? const0_rtx : target),
                   3955:                          VOIDmode, 0);
                   3956: 
                   3957:     case COND_EXPR:
                   3958:       {
                   3959:        /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
                   3960:           are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
                   3961:           a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
                   3962:           for side effect only.  If type is void, we must do likewise.  */
                   3963: 
                   3964:        /* If an arm of the branch requires a cleanup,
                   3965:           only that cleanup is performed.  */
                   3966: 
                   3967:        tree singleton = 0;
                   3968:        tree binary_op = 0, unary_op = 0;
                   3969:        tree old_cleanups = cleanups_this_call;
                   3970:        cleanups_this_call = 0;
                   3971: 
                   3972:        /* If this is (A ? 1 : 0) and A is a condition, just evaluate it and
                   3973:           convert it to our mode, if necessary.  */
                   3974:        if (integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   3975:            && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
                   3976:            && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<')
                   3977:          {
                   3978:            op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, mode, modifier);
                   3979:            if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
                   3980:              return op0;
                   3981:            if (target == 0)
                   3982:              target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3983:            convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp);
                   3984:            return target;
                   3985:          }
                   3986: 
                   3987:        /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target.  Otherwise,
                   3988:           if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
                   3989:           intermediate target unless it is safe.  If no target, use a 
                   3990:           temporary.  */
                   3991: 
                   3992:        if (mode == VOIDmode || ignore)
                   3993:          temp = 0;
                   3994:        else if (original_target
                   3995:                 && safe_from_p (original_target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
                   3996:          temp = original_target;
                   3997:        else if (mode == BLKmode)
                   3998:          {
                   3999:            if (TYPE_SIZE (type) == 0
                   4000:                || TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4001:              abort ();
                   4002:            temp = assign_stack_temp (BLKmode,
                   4003:                                      (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (type))
                   4004:                                       + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
                   4005:                                      / BITS_PER_UNIT, 0);
                   4006:          }
                   4007:        else
                   4008:          temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4009: 
                   4010:        /* Check for X ? A + B : A.  If we have this, we can copy
                   4011:           A to the output and conditionally add B.  Similarly for unary
                   4012:           operations.  Don't do this if X has side-effects because
                   4013:           those side effects might affect A or B and the "?" operation is
                   4014:           a sequence point in ANSI.  (We test for side effects later.)  */
                   4015: 
                   4016:        if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == '2'
                   4017:            && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
                   4018:                                TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0), 0))
                   4019:          singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), binary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4020:        else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))) == '2'
                   4021:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   4022:                                     TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0), 0))
                   4023:          singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), binary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
                   4024:        else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == '1'
                   4025:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
                   4026:                                     TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0), 0))
                   4027:          singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), unary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4028:        else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))) == '1'
                   4029:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   4030:                                     TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0), 0))
                   4031:          singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), unary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
                   4032: 
                   4033:        /* If we had X ? A + 1 : A and we can do the test of X as a store-flag
                   4034:           operation, do this as A + (X != 0).  Similarly for other simple
                   4035:           binary operators.  */
                   4036:        if (singleton && binary_op
                   4037:            && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   4038:            && (TREE_CODE (binary_op) == PLUS_EXPR
                   4039:                || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == MINUS_EXPR
                   4040:                || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
                   4041:                || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_XOR_EXPR
                   4042:                || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_AND_EXPR)
                   4043:            && integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1))
                   4044:            && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<')
                   4045:          {
                   4046:            rtx result;
                   4047:            optab boptab = (TREE_CODE (binary_op) == PLUS_EXPR ? add_optab
                   4048:                            : TREE_CODE (binary_op) == MINUS_EXPR ? sub_optab
                   4049:                            : TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? ior_optab
                   4050:                            : TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_XOR_EXPR ? xor_optab
                   4051:                            : and_optab);
                   4052: 
                   4053:            /* If we had X ? A : A + 1, do this as A + (X == 0).
                   4054: 
                   4055:               We have to invert the truth value here and then put it
                   4056:               back later if do_store_flag fails.  We cannot simply copy
                   4057:               TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) to another variable and modify that
                   4058:               because invert_truthvalue can modify the tree pointed to
                   4059:               by its argument.  */
                   4060:            if (singleton == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4061:              TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)
                   4062:                = invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   4063: 
                   4064:            result = do_store_flag (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   4065:                                    safe_from_p (temp, singleton) ? temp : 0,
                   4066:                                    mode, BRANCH_COST <= 1);
                   4067: 
                   4068:            if (result)
                   4069:              {
                   4070:                op1 = expand_expr (singleton, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4071:                return expand_binop (mode, boptab, op1, result, temp,
                   4072:                                     unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   4073:              }
                   4074:            else if (singleton == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4075:              TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)
                   4076:                = invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   4077:          }
                   4078:            
                   4079:        NO_DEFER_POP;
                   4080:        op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   4081: 
                   4082:        if (singleton && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
                   4083:          {
                   4084:            if (temp != 0)
                   4085:              {
                   4086:                /* If the target conflicts with the other operand of the
                   4087:                   binary op, we can't use it.  Also, we can't use the target
                   4088:                   if it is a hard register, because evaluating the condition
                   4089:                   might clobber it.  */
                   4090:                if ((binary_op
                   4091:                     && ! safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1)))
                   4092:                    || (GET_CODE (temp) == REG
                   4093:                        && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   4094:                  temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4095:                store_expr (singleton, temp, 0);
                   4096:              }
                   4097:            else
                   4098:              expand_expr (singleton, ignore ? const1_rtx : 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4099:            if (cleanups_this_call)
                   4100:              {
                   4101:                sorry ("aggregate value in COND_EXPR");
                   4102:                cleanups_this_call = 0;
                   4103:              }
                   4104:            if (singleton == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4105:              jumpif (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4106:            else
                   4107:              jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4108: 
                   4109:            if (binary_op && temp == 0)
                   4110:              /* Just touch the other operand.  */
                   4111:              expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1),
                   4112:                           ignore ? const0_rtx : 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4113:            else if (binary_op)
                   4114:              store_expr (build (TREE_CODE (binary_op), type,
                   4115:                                 make_tree (type, temp),
                   4116:                                 TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1)),
                   4117:                          temp, 0);
                   4118:            else
                   4119:              store_expr (build1 (TREE_CODE (unary_op), type,
                   4120:                                  make_tree (type, temp)),
                   4121:                          temp, 0);
                   4122:            op1 = op0;
                   4123:          }
                   4124: #if 0
                   4125:        /* This is now done in jump.c and is better done there because it
                   4126:           produces shorter register lifetimes.  */
                   4127:           
                   4128:        /* Check for both possibilities either constants or variables
                   4129:           in registers (but not the same as the target!).  If so, can
                   4130:           save branches by assigning one, branching, and assigning the
                   4131:           other.  */
                   4132:        else if (temp && GET_MODE (temp) != BLKmode
                   4133:                 && (TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4134:                     || ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == PARM_DECL
                   4135:                          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == VAR_DECL)
                   4136:                         && DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4137:                         && GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == REG
                   4138:                         && DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != temp))
                   4139:                 && (TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
                   4140:                     || ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) == PARM_DECL
                   4141:                          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) == VAR_DECL)
                   4142:                         && DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
                   4143:                         && GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))) == REG
                   4144:                         && DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) != temp)))
                   4145:          {
                   4146:            if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   4147:              temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4148:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, 0);
                   4149:            jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4150:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, 0);
                   4151:            op1 = op0;
                   4152:          }
                   4153: #endif
                   4154:        /* Check for A op 0 ? A : FOO and A op 0 ? FOO : A where OP is any
                   4155:           comparison operator.  If we have one of these cases, set the
                   4156:           output to A, branch on A (cse will merge these two references),
                   4157:           then set the output to FOO.  */
                   4158:        else if (temp
                   4159:                 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<'
                   4160:                 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1))
                   4161:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
                   4162:                                     TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)
                   4163:                 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   4164:                 && safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)))
                   4165:          {
                   4166:            if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   4167:              temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4168:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, 0);
                   4169:            jumpif (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4170:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, 0);
                   4171:            op1 = op0;
                   4172:          }
                   4173:        else if (temp
                   4174:                 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<'
                   4175:                 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1))
                   4176:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
                   4177:                                     TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0)
                   4178:                 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   4179:                 && safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   4180:          {
                   4181:            if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   4182:              temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4183:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, 0);
                   4184:            jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4185:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, 0);
                   4186:            op1 = op0;
                   4187:          }
                   4188:        else
                   4189:          {
                   4190:            op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   4191:            jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4192:            if (temp != 0)
                   4193:              store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, 0);
                   4194:            else
                   4195:              expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), ignore ? const0_rtx : 0,
                   4196:                           VOIDmode, 0);
                   4197:            if (cleanups_this_call)
                   4198:              {
                   4199:                sorry ("aggregate value in COND_EXPR");
                   4200:                cleanups_this_call = 0;
                   4201:              }
                   4202: 
                   4203:            emit_queue ();
                   4204:            emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1));
                   4205:            emit_barrier ();
                   4206:            emit_label (op0);
                   4207:            if (temp != 0)
                   4208:              store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, 0);
                   4209:            else
                   4210:              expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), ignore ? const0_rtx : 0,
                   4211:                           VOIDmode, 0);
                   4212:          }
                   4213: 
                   4214:        if (cleanups_this_call)
                   4215:          {
                   4216:            sorry ("aggregate value in COND_EXPR");
                   4217:            cleanups_this_call = 0;
                   4218:          }
                   4219: 
                   4220:        emit_queue ();
                   4221:        emit_label (op1);
                   4222:        OK_DEFER_POP;
                   4223:        cleanups_this_call = old_cleanups;
                   4224:        return temp;
                   4225:       }
                   4226: 
                   4227:     case TARGET_EXPR:
                   4228:       {
                   4229:        /* Something needs to be initialized, but we didn't know
                   4230:           where that thing was when building the tree.  For example,
                   4231:           it could be the return value of a function, or a parameter
                   4232:           to a function which lays down in the stack, or a temporary
                   4233:           variable which must be passed by reference.
                   4234: 
                   4235:           We guarantee that the expression will either be constructed
                   4236:           or copied into our original target.  */
                   4237: 
                   4238:        tree slot = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4239: 
                   4240:        if (TREE_CODE (slot) != VAR_DECL)
                   4241:          abort ();
                   4242: 
                   4243:        if (target == 0)
                   4244:          {
                   4245:            if (DECL_RTL (slot) != 0)
                   4246:              target = DECL_RTL (slot);
                   4247:            else
                   4248:              {
                   4249:                target = assign_stack_temp (mode, int_size_in_bytes (type), 0);
                   4250:                /* All temp slots at this level must not conflict.  */
                   4251:                preserve_temp_slots (target);
                   4252:                DECL_RTL (slot) = target;
                   4253:              }
                   4254: 
                   4255: #if 0
                   4256:            /* Since SLOT is not known to the called function
                   4257:               to belong to its stack frame, we must build an explicit
                   4258:               cleanup.  This case occurs when we must build up a reference
                   4259:               to pass the reference as an argument.  In this case,
                   4260:               it is very likely that such a reference need not be
                   4261:               built here.  */
                   4262: 
                   4263:            if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) == 0)
                   4264:              TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) = maybe_build_cleanup (slot);
                   4265:            if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
                   4266:              cleanups_this_call = tree_cons (0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
                   4267:                                                 cleanups_this_call);
                   4268: #endif
                   4269:          }
                   4270:        else
                   4271:          {
                   4272:            /* This case does occur, when expanding a parameter which
                   4273:               needs to be constructed on the stack.  The target
                   4274:               is the actual stack address that we want to initialize.
                   4275:               The function we call will perform the cleanup in this case.  */
                   4276: 
                   4277:            DECL_RTL (slot) = target;
                   4278:          }
                   4279: 
                   4280:        return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, tmode, modifier);
                   4281:       }
                   4282: 
                   4283:     case INIT_EXPR:
                   4284:       {
                   4285:        tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4286:        tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4287:        tree noncopied_parts = 0;
                   4288:        tree lhs_type = TREE_TYPE (lhs);
                   4289: 
                   4290:        temp = expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, ! ignore, original_target != 0);
                   4291:        if (TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type) != 0 && !fixed_type_p (rhs))
                   4292:          noncopied_parts = init_noncopied_parts (stabilize_reference (lhs),
                   4293:                                                  TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type));
                   4294:        while (noncopied_parts != 0)
                   4295:          {
                   4296:            expand_assignment (TREE_VALUE (noncopied_parts),
                   4297:                               TREE_PURPOSE (noncopied_parts), 0, 0);
                   4298:            noncopied_parts = TREE_CHAIN (noncopied_parts);
                   4299:          }
                   4300:        return temp;
                   4301:       }
                   4302: 
                   4303:     case MODIFY_EXPR:
                   4304:       {
                   4305:        /* If lhs is complex, expand calls in rhs before computing it.
                   4306:           That's so we don't compute a pointer and save it over a call.
                   4307:           If lhs is simple, compute it first so we can give it as a
                   4308:           target if the rhs is just a call.  This avoids an extra temp and copy
                   4309:           and that prevents a partial-subsumption which makes bad code.
                   4310:           Actually we could treat component_ref's of vars like vars.  */
                   4311: 
                   4312:        tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4313:        tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4314:        tree noncopied_parts = 0;
                   4315:        tree lhs_type = TREE_TYPE (lhs);
                   4316: 
                   4317:        temp = 0;
                   4318: 
                   4319:        if (TREE_CODE (lhs) != VAR_DECL
                   4320:            && TREE_CODE (lhs) != RESULT_DECL
                   4321:            && TREE_CODE (lhs) != PARM_DECL)
                   4322:          preexpand_calls (exp);
                   4323: 
                   4324:        /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
                   4325:           of size 1.  In this case, (unless we need the result of the
                   4326:           assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
                   4327:           test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
                   4328: 
                   4329:           ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here.  But if
                   4330:           things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
                   4331:           support it.  */
                   4332:        if (ignore
                   4333:            && TREE_CODE (lhs) == COMPONENT_REF
                   4334:            && (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
                   4335:                || TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR)
                   4336:            && TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 0) == lhs
                   4337:            && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
                   4338:            && TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs, 1))) == 1
                   4339:            && TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1), 1))) == 1)
                   4340:          {
                   4341:            rtx label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   4342: 
                   4343:            do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1),
                   4344:                     TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? label : 0,
                   4345:                     TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR ? label : 0);
                   4346:            expand_assignment (lhs, convert (TREE_TYPE (rhs),
                   4347:                                             (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
                   4348:                                              ? integer_one_node
                   4349:                                              : integer_zero_node)),
                   4350:                               0, 0);
                   4351:            emit_label (label);
                   4352:            return const0_rtx;
                   4353:          }
                   4354: 
                   4355:        if (TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type) != 0
                   4356:            && ! (fixed_type_p (lhs) && fixed_type_p (rhs)))
                   4357:          noncopied_parts = save_noncopied_parts (stabilize_reference (lhs),
                   4358:                                                  TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type));
                   4359: 
                   4360:        temp = expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, ! ignore, original_target != 0);
                   4361:        while (noncopied_parts != 0)
                   4362:          {
                   4363:            expand_assignment (TREE_PURPOSE (noncopied_parts),
                   4364:                               TREE_VALUE (noncopied_parts), 0, 0);
                   4365:            noncopied_parts = TREE_CHAIN (noncopied_parts);
                   4366:          }
                   4367:        return temp;
                   4368:       }
                   4369: 
                   4370:     case PREINCREMENT_EXPR:
                   4371:     case PREDECREMENT_EXPR:
                   4372:       return expand_increment (exp, 0);
                   4373: 
                   4374:     case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR:
                   4375:     case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR:
                   4376:       /* Faster to treat as pre-increment if result is not used.  */
                   4377:       return expand_increment (exp, ! ignore);
                   4378: 
                   4379:     case ADDR_EXPR:
                   4380:       /* Are we taking the address of a nested function?  */
                   4381:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == FUNCTION_DECL
                   4382:          && decl_function_context (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) != 0)
                   4383:        {
                   4384:          op0 = trampoline_address (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   4385:          op0 = force_operand (op0, target);
                   4386:        }
                   4387:       else
                   4388:        {
                   4389:          op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode,
                   4390:                             (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
                   4391:                              ? modifier : EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS));
                   4392:          if (GET_CODE (op0) != MEM)
                   4393:            abort ();
                   4394:   
                   4395:          if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   4396:            return XEXP (op0, 0);
                   4397:          op0 = force_operand (XEXP (op0, 0), target);
                   4398:        }
                   4399:       if (flag_force_addr && GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
                   4400:        return force_reg (Pmode, op0);
                   4401:       return op0;
                   4402: 
                   4403:     case ENTRY_VALUE_EXPR:
                   4404:       abort ();
                   4405: 
                   4406:     case ERROR_MARK:
                   4407:       return const0_rtx;
                   4408: 
                   4409:     default:
                   4410:       return (*lang_expand_expr) (exp, target, tmode, modifier);
                   4411:     }
                   4412: 
                   4413:   /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator, generating an instruction
                   4414:      from the optab already placed in `this_optab'.  */
                   4415:  binop:
                   4416:   preexpand_calls (exp);
                   4417:   if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   4418:     subtarget = 0;
                   4419:   op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4420:   op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4421:  binop2:
                   4422:   temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target,
                   4423:                       unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   4424:   if (temp == 0)
                   4425:     abort ();
                   4426:   return temp;
                   4427: }
                   4428: 
                   4429: /* Return the alignment of EXP, a pointer valued expression for the mem*
                   4430:    builtin functions.  Alignments greater than MAX_ALIGN are not significant.
                   4431:    The alignment returned is, by default, the alignment of the thing that
                   4432:    EXP points to (if it is not a POINTER_TYPE, 0 is returned).
                   4433: 
                   4434:    Otherwise, look at the expression to see if we can do better, i.e., if the
                   4435:    expression is actually pointing at an object whose alignment is tighter.  */
                   4436: 
                   4437: static int
                   4438: get_pointer_alignment (exp, max_align)
                   4439:      tree exp;
                   4440:      unsigned max_align;
                   4441: {
                   4442:   unsigned align, inner;
                   4443: 
                   4444:   if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   4445:     return 0;
                   4446: 
                   4447:   align = TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   4448:   align = MIN (align, max_align);
                   4449: 
                   4450:   while (1)
                   4451:     {
                   4452:       switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
                   4453:        {
                   4454:        case NOP_EXPR:
                   4455:        case CONVERT_EXPR:
                   4456:        case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
                   4457:          exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4458:          if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   4459:            return align;
                   4460:          inner = TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   4461:          inner = MIN (inner, max_align);
                   4462:          align = MAX (align, inner);
                   4463:          break;
                   4464: 
                   4465:        case PLUS_EXPR:
                   4466:          /* If sum of pointer + int, restrict our maximum alignment to that
                   4467:             imposed by the integer.  If not, we can't do any better than
                   4468:             ALIGN.  */
                   4469:          if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4470:            return align;
                   4471: 
                   4472:          while ((TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4473:                  & (max_align - 1)) != 0)
                   4474:            max_align >>= 1;
                   4475: 
                   4476:          exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4477:          break;
                   4478: 
                   4479:        case ADDR_EXPR:
                   4480:          /* See what we are pointing at and look at its alignment.  */
                   4481:          exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4482:          if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)) == 'd')
                   4483:            align = MAX (align, DECL_ALIGN (exp));
                   4484: #ifdef CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
                   4485:          else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)) == 'c')
                   4486:            align = CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (exp, align);
                   4487: #endif
                   4488:          return MIN (align, max_align);
                   4489: 
                   4490:        default:
                   4491:          return align;
                   4492:        }
                   4493:     }
                   4494: }
                   4495: 
                   4496: /* Return the tree node and offset if a given argument corresponds to
                   4497:    a string constant.  */
                   4498: 
                   4499: static tree
                   4500: string_constant (arg, ptr_offset)
                   4501:      tree arg;
                   4502:      tree *ptr_offset;
                   4503: {
                   4504:   STRIP_NOPS (arg);
                   4505: 
                   4506:   if (TREE_CODE (arg) == ADDR_EXPR
                   4507:       && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == STRING_CST)
                   4508:     {
                   4509:       *ptr_offset = integer_zero_node;
                   4510:       return TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
                   4511:     }
                   4512:   else if (TREE_CODE (arg) == PLUS_EXPR)
                   4513:     {
                   4514:       tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
                   4515:       tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 1);
                   4516: 
                   4517:       STRIP_NOPS (arg0);
                   4518:       STRIP_NOPS (arg1);
                   4519: 
                   4520:       if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == ADDR_EXPR
                   4521:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == STRING_CST)
                   4522:        {
                   4523:          *ptr_offset = arg1;
                   4524:          return TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0);
                   4525:        }
                   4526:       else if (TREE_CODE (arg1) == ADDR_EXPR
                   4527:               && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == STRING_CST)
                   4528:        {
                   4529:          *ptr_offset = arg0;
                   4530:          return TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0);
                   4531:        }
                   4532:     }
                   4533: 
                   4534:   return 0;
                   4535: }
                   4536: 
                   4537: /* Compute the length of a C string.  TREE_STRING_LENGTH is not the right
                   4538:    way, because it could contain a zero byte in the middle.
                   4539:    TREE_STRING_LENGTH is the size of the character array, not the string.
                   4540: 
                   4541:    Unfortunately, string_constant can't access the values of const char
                   4542:    arrays with initializers, so neither can we do so here.  */
                   4543: 
                   4544: static tree
                   4545: c_strlen (src)
                   4546:      tree src;
                   4547: {
                   4548:   tree offset_node;
                   4549:   int offset, max;
                   4550:   char *ptr;
                   4551: 
                   4552:   src = string_constant (src, &offset_node);
                   4553:   if (src == 0)
                   4554:     return 0;
                   4555:   max = TREE_STRING_LENGTH (src);
                   4556:   ptr = TREE_STRING_POINTER (src);
                   4557:   if (offset_node && TREE_CODE (offset_node) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4558:     {
                   4559:       /* If the string has an internal zero byte (e.g., "foo\0bar"), we can't
                   4560:         compute the offset to the following null if we don't know where to
                   4561:         start searching for it.  */
                   4562:       int i;
                   4563:       for (i = 0; i < max; i++)
                   4564:        if (ptr[i] == 0)
                   4565:          return 0;
                   4566:       /* We don't know the starting offset, but we do know that the string
                   4567:         has no internal zero bytes.  We can assume that the offset falls
                   4568:         within the bounds of the string; otherwise, the programmer deserves
                   4569:         what he gets.  Subtract the offset from the length of the string,
                   4570:         and return that.  */
                   4571:       /* This would perhaps not be valid if we were dealing with named
                   4572:          arrays in addition to literal string constants.  */
                   4573:       return size_binop (MINUS_EXPR, size_int (max), offset_node);
                   4574:     }
                   4575: 
                   4576:   /* We have a known offset into the string.  Start searching there for
                   4577:      a null character.  */
                   4578:   if (offset_node == 0)
                   4579:     offset = 0;
                   4580:   else
                   4581:     {
                   4582:       /* Did we get a long long offset?  If so, punt.  */
                   4583:       if (TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (offset_node) != 0)
                   4584:        return 0;
                   4585:       offset = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (offset_node);
                   4586:     }
                   4587:   /* If the offset is known to be out of bounds, warn, and call strlen at
                   4588:      runtime.  */
                   4589:   if (offset < 0 || offset > max)
                   4590:     {
                   4591:       warning ("offset outside bounds of constant string");
                   4592:       return 0;
                   4593:     }
                   4594:   /* Use strlen to search for the first zero byte.  Since any strings
                   4595:      constructed with build_string will have nulls appended, we win even
                   4596:      if we get handed something like (char[4])"abcd".
                   4597: 
                   4598:      Since OFFSET is our starting index into the string, no further
                   4599:      calculation is needed.  */
                   4600:   return size_int (strlen (ptr + offset));
                   4601: }
                   4602: 
                   4603: /* Expand an expression EXP that calls a built-in function,
                   4604:    with result going to TARGET if that's convenient
                   4605:    (and in mode MODE if that's convenient).
                   4606:    SUBTARGET may be used as the target for computing one of EXP's operands.
                   4607:    IGNORE is nonzero if the value is to be ignored.  */
                   4608: 
                   4609: static rtx
                   4610: expand_builtin (exp, target, subtarget, mode, ignore)
                   4611:      tree exp;
                   4612:      rtx target;
                   4613:      rtx subtarget;
                   4614:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   4615:      int ignore;
                   4616: {
                   4617:   tree fndecl = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
                   4618:   tree arglist = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4619:   rtx op0;
                   4620:   enum machine_mode value_mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   4621: 
                   4622:   switch (DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl))
                   4623:     {
                   4624:     case BUILT_IN_ABS:
                   4625:     case BUILT_IN_LABS:
                   4626:     case BUILT_IN_FABS:
                   4627:       /* build_function_call changes these into ABS_EXPR.  */
                   4628:       abort ();
                   4629: 
                   4630:     case BUILT_IN_SAVEREGS:
                   4631:       /* Don't do __builtin_saveregs more than once in a function.
                   4632:         Save the result of the first call and reuse it.  */
                   4633:       if (saveregs_value != 0)
                   4634:        return saveregs_value;
                   4635:       {
                   4636:        /* When this function is called, it means that registers must be
                   4637:           saved on entry to this function.  So we migrate the
                   4638:           call to the first insn of this function.  */
                   4639:        rtx temp;
                   4640:        rtx seq;
                   4641:        rtx valreg, saved_valreg;
                   4642: 
                   4643:        /* Now really call the function.  `expand_call' does not call
                   4644:           expand_builtin, so there is no danger of infinite recursion here.  */
                   4645:        start_sequence ();
                   4646: 
                   4647: #ifdef EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
                   4648:        /* Do whatever the machine needs done in this case.  */
                   4649:        temp = EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS (arglist);
                   4650: #else
                   4651:        /* The register where the function returns its value
                   4652:           is likely to have something else in it, such as an argument.
                   4653:           So preserve that register around the call.  */
                   4654:        if (value_mode != VOIDmode)
                   4655:          {
                   4656:            valreg = hard_libcall_value (value_mode);
                   4657:            saved_valreg = gen_reg_rtx (value_mode);
                   4658:            emit_move_insn (saved_valreg, valreg);
                   4659:          }
                   4660: 
                   4661:        /* Generate the call, putting the value in a pseudo.  */
                   4662:        temp = expand_call (exp, target, ignore);
                   4663: 
                   4664:        if (value_mode != VOIDmode)
                   4665:          emit_move_insn (valreg, saved_valreg);
                   4666: #endif
                   4667: 
                   4668:        seq = get_insns ();
                   4669:        end_sequence ();
                   4670: 
                   4671:        saveregs_value = temp;
                   4672: 
                   4673:        /* This won't work inside a SEQUENCE--it really has to be
                   4674:           at the start of the function.  */
                   4675:        if (in_sequence_p ())
                   4676:          {
                   4677:            /* Better to do this than to crash.  */
                   4678:            error ("`va_start' used within `({...})'");
                   4679:            return temp;
                   4680:          }
                   4681: 
                   4682:        /* Put the sequence after the NOTE that starts the function.  */
                   4683:        emit_insns_before (seq, NEXT_INSN (get_insns ()));
                   4684:        return temp;
                   4685:       }
                   4686: 
                   4687:       /* __builtin_args_info (N) returns word N of the arg space info
                   4688:         for the current function.  The number and meanings of words
                   4689:         is controlled by the definition of CUMULATIVE_ARGS.  */
                   4690:     case BUILT_IN_ARGS_INFO:
                   4691:       {
                   4692:        int nwords = sizeof (CUMULATIVE_ARGS) / sizeof (int);
                   4693:        int i;
                   4694:        int *word_ptr = (int *) &current_function_args_info;
                   4695:        tree type, elts, result;
                   4696: 
                   4697:        if (sizeof (CUMULATIVE_ARGS) % sizeof (int) != 0)
                   4698:          fatal ("CUMULATIVE_ARGS type defined badly; see %s, line %d",
                   4699:                 __FILE__, __LINE__);
                   4700: 
                   4701:        if (arglist != 0)
                   4702:          {
                   4703:            tree arg = TREE_VALUE (arglist);
                   4704:            if (TREE_CODE (arg) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4705:              error ("argument of __builtin_args_info must be constant");
                   4706:            else
                   4707:              {
                   4708:                int wordnum = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (arg);
                   4709: 
                   4710:                if (wordnum < 0 || wordnum >= nwords)
                   4711:                  error ("argument of __builtin_args_info out of range");
                   4712:                else
                   4713:                  return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, word_ptr[wordnum]);
                   4714:              }
                   4715:          }
                   4716:        else
                   4717:          error ("missing argument in __builtin_args_info");
                   4718: 
                   4719:        return const0_rtx;
                   4720: 
                   4721: #if 0
                   4722:        for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
                   4723:          elts = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, build_int_2 (word_ptr[i], 0));
                   4724: 
                   4725:        type = build_array_type (integer_type_node,
                   4726:                                 build_index_type (build_int_2 (nwords, 0)));
                   4727:        result = build (CONSTRUCTOR, type, NULL_TREE, nreverse (elts));
                   4728:        TREE_CONSTANT (result) = 1;
                   4729:        TREE_STATIC (result) = 1;
                   4730:        result = build (INDIRECT_REF, build_pointer_type (type), result);
                   4731:        TREE_CONSTANT (result) = 1;
                   4732:        return expand_expr (result, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4733: #endif
                   4734:       }
                   4735: 
                   4736:       /* Return the address of the first anonymous stack arg.  */
                   4737:     case BUILT_IN_NEXT_ARG:
                   4738:       {
                   4739:        tree fntype = TREE_TYPE (current_function_decl);
                   4740:        if (!(TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype) != 0
                   4741:              && (TREE_VALUE (tree_last (TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype)))
                   4742:                  != void_type_node)))
                   4743:          {
                   4744:            error ("`va_start' used in function with fixed args");
                   4745:            return const0_rtx;
                   4746:          }
                   4747:       }
                   4748: 
                   4749:       return expand_binop (Pmode, add_optab,
                   4750:                           current_function_internal_arg_pointer,
                   4751:                           current_function_arg_offset_rtx,
                   4752:                           0, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   4753: 
                   4754:     case BUILT_IN_CLASSIFY_TYPE:
                   4755:       if (arglist != 0)
                   4756:        {
                   4757:          tree type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist));
                   4758:          enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (type);
                   4759:          if (code == VOID_TYPE)
                   4760:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, void_type_class);
                   4761:          if (code == INTEGER_TYPE)
                   4762:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, integer_type_class);
                   4763:          if (code == CHAR_TYPE)
                   4764:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, char_type_class);
                   4765:          if (code == ENUMERAL_TYPE)
                   4766:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, enumeral_type_class);
                   4767:          if (code == BOOLEAN_TYPE)
                   4768:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, boolean_type_class);
                   4769:          if (code == POINTER_TYPE)
                   4770:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, pointer_type_class);
                   4771:          if (code == REFERENCE_TYPE)
                   4772:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, reference_type_class);
                   4773:          if (code == OFFSET_TYPE)
                   4774:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, offset_type_class);
                   4775:          if (code == REAL_TYPE)
                   4776:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, real_type_class);
                   4777:          if (code == COMPLEX_TYPE)
                   4778:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, complex_type_class);
                   4779:          if (code == FUNCTION_TYPE)
                   4780:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, function_type_class);
                   4781:          if (code == METHOD_TYPE)
                   4782:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, method_type_class);
                   4783:          if (code == RECORD_TYPE)
                   4784:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, record_type_class);
                   4785:          if (code == UNION_TYPE)
                   4786:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, union_type_class);
                   4787:          if (code == ARRAY_TYPE)
                   4788:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, array_type_class);
                   4789:          if (code == STRING_TYPE)
                   4790:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, string_type_class);
                   4791:          if (code == SET_TYPE)
                   4792:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, set_type_class);
                   4793:          if (code == FILE_TYPE)
                   4794:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, file_type_class);
                   4795:          if (code == LANG_TYPE)
                   4796:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, lang_type_class);
                   4797:        }
                   4798:       return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, no_type_class);
                   4799: 
                   4800:     case BUILT_IN_CONSTANT_P:
                   4801:       if (arglist == 0)
                   4802:        return const0_rtx;
                   4803:       else
                   4804:        return (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_VALUE (arglist)) == 'c'
                   4805:                ? const1_rtx : const0_rtx);
                   4806: 
                   4807:     case BUILT_IN_FRAME_ADDRESS:
                   4808:       /* The argument must be a nonnegative integer constant.
                   4809:         It counts the number of frames to scan up the stack.
                   4810:         The value is the address of that frame.  */
                   4811:     case BUILT_IN_RETURN_ADDRESS:
                   4812:       /* The argument must be a nonnegative integer constant.
                   4813:         It counts the number of frames to scan up the stack.
                   4814:         The value is the return address saved in that frame.  */
                   4815:       if (arglist == 0)
                   4816:        /* Warning about missing arg was already issued.  */
                   4817:        return const0_rtx;
                   4818:       else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (arglist)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4819:        {
                   4820:          error ("invalid arg to __builtin_return_address");
                   4821:          return const0_rtx;
                   4822:        }
                   4823:       else if (tree_int_cst_lt (TREE_VALUE (arglist), integer_zero_node))
                   4824:        {
                   4825:          error ("invalid arg to __builtin_return_address");
                   4826:          return const0_rtx;
                   4827:        }
                   4828:       else
                   4829:        {
                   4830:          int count = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (arglist)); 
                   4831:          rtx tem = frame_pointer_rtx;
                   4832:          int i;
                   4833: 
                   4834:          /* Scan back COUNT frames to the specified frame.  */
                   4835:          for (i = 0; i < count; i++)
                   4836:            {
                   4837:              /* Assume the dynamic chain pointer is in the word that
                   4838:                 the frame address points to, unless otherwise specified.  */
                   4839: #ifdef DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
                   4840:              tem = DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (tem);
                   4841: #endif
                   4842:              tem = memory_address (Pmode, tem);
                   4843:              tem = copy_to_reg (gen_rtx (MEM, Pmode, tem));
                   4844:            }
                   4845: 
                   4846:          /* For __builtin_frame_address, return what we've got.  */
                   4847:          if (DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl) == BUILT_IN_FRAME_ADDRESS)
                   4848:            return tem;
                   4849: 
                   4850:          /* For __builtin_return_address,
                   4851:             Get the return address from that frame.  */
                   4852: #ifdef RETURN_ADDR_RTX
                   4853:          return RETURN_ADDR_RTX (count, tem);
                   4854: #else
                   4855:          tem = memory_address (Pmode,
                   4856:                                plus_constant (tem, GET_MODE_SIZE (Pmode)));
                   4857:          return copy_to_reg (gen_rtx (MEM, Pmode, tem));
                   4858: #endif
                   4859:        }
                   4860: 
                   4861:     case BUILT_IN_ALLOCA:
                   4862:       if (arglist == 0
                   4863:          /* Arg could be non-integer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4864:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != INTEGER_TYPE)
                   4865:        return const0_rtx;
                   4866:       current_function_calls_alloca = 1;
                   4867:       /* Compute the argument.  */
                   4868:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (arglist), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4869: 
                   4870:       /* Allocate the desired space.  */
                   4871:       target = allocate_dynamic_stack_space (op0, target);
                   4872: 
                   4873:       /* Record the new stack level for nonlocal gotos.  */
                   4874:       if (nonlocal_goto_stack_level != 0)
                   4875:        emit_move_insn (nonlocal_goto_stack_level, stack_pointer_rtx);
                   4876:       return target;
                   4877: 
                   4878:     case BUILT_IN_FFS:
                   4879:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   4880:       if (!optimize)
                   4881:        break;
                   4882: 
                   4883:       if (arglist == 0
                   4884:          /* Arg could be non-integer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4885:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != INTEGER_TYPE)
                   4886:        return const0_rtx;
                   4887: 
                   4888:       /* Compute the argument.  */
                   4889:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (arglist), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4890:       /* Compute ffs, into TARGET if possible.
                   4891:         Set TARGET to wherever the result comes back.  */
                   4892:       target = expand_unop (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))),
                   4893:                            ffs_optab, op0, target, 1);
                   4894:       if (target == 0)
                   4895:        abort ();
                   4896:       return target;
                   4897: 
                   4898:     case BUILT_IN_STRLEN:
                   4899:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   4900:       if (!optimize)
                   4901:        break;
                   4902: 
                   4903:       if (arglist == 0
                   4904:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4905:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   4906:        return const0_rtx;
                   4907:       else
                   4908:        {
                   4909:          tree len = c_strlen (TREE_VALUE (arglist));
                   4910: 
                   4911:          if (len == 0)
                   4912:            break;
                   4913:          return expand_expr (len, target, mode, 0);
                   4914:        }
                   4915: 
                   4916:     case BUILT_IN_STRCPY:
                   4917:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   4918:       if (!optimize)
                   4919:        break;
                   4920: 
                   4921:       if (arglist == 0
                   4922:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4923:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   4924:          || TREE_CHAIN (arglist) == 0
                   4925:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)))) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   4926:        return const0_rtx;
                   4927:       else
                   4928:        {
                   4929:          tree len = c_strlen (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)));
                   4930: 
                   4931:          if (len == 0)
                   4932:            break;
                   4933: 
                   4934:          len = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, len, integer_one_node);
                   4935: 
                   4936:          chainon (arglist, build_tree_list (0, len));
                   4937:        }
                   4938: 
                   4939:       /* Drops in.  */
                   4940:     case BUILT_IN_MEMCPY:
                   4941:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   4942:       if (!optimize)
                   4943:        break;
                   4944: 
                   4945:       if (arglist == 0
                   4946:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4947:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   4948:          || TREE_CHAIN (arglist) == 0
                   4949:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   4950:          || TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)) == 0
                   4951:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist))))) != INTEGER_TYPE)
                   4952:        return const0_rtx;
                   4953:       else
                   4954:        {
                   4955:          tree dest = TREE_VALUE (arglist);
                   4956:          tree src = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist));
                   4957:          tree len = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)));
                   4958: 
                   4959:          int src_align
                   4960:            = get_pointer_alignment (src, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
                   4961:          int dest_align
                   4962:            = get_pointer_alignment (dest, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
                   4963:          rtx dest_rtx;
                   4964: 
                   4965:          /* If either SRC or DEST is not a pointer type, don't do
                   4966:             this operation in-line.  */
                   4967:          if (src_align == 0 || dest_align == 0)
                   4968:            {
                   4969:              if (DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl) == BUILT_IN_STRCPY)
                   4970:                TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)) = 0;
                   4971:              break;
                   4972:            }
                   4973: 
                   4974:          dest_rtx = expand_expr (dest, 0, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
                   4975: 
                   4976:          /* Copy word part most expediently.  */
                   4977:          emit_block_move (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode,
                   4978:                                    memory_address (BLKmode, dest_rtx)),
                   4979:                           gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode,
                   4980:                                    memory_address (BLKmode,
                   4981:                                                    expand_expr (src, 0, Pmode,
                   4982:                                                                 EXPAND_NORMAL))),
                   4983:                           expand_expr (len, 0, VOIDmode, 0),
                   4984:                           MIN (src_align, dest_align));
                   4985:          return dest_rtx;
                   4986:        }
                   4987: 
                   4988: /* These comparison functions need an instruction that returns an actual
                   4989:    index.  An ordinary compare that just sets the condition codes
                   4990:    is not enough.  */
                   4991: #ifdef HAVE_cmpstrsi
                   4992:     case BUILT_IN_STRCMP:
                   4993:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   4994:       if (!optimize)
                   4995:        break;
                   4996: 
                   4997:       if (arglist == 0
                   4998:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4999:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   5000:          || TREE_CHAIN (arglist) == 0
                   5001:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)))) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   5002:        return const0_rtx;
                   5003:       else if (!HAVE_cmpstrsi)
                   5004:        break;
                   5005:       {
                   5006:        tree arg1 = TREE_VALUE (arglist);
                   5007:        tree arg2 = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist));
                   5008:        tree offset;
                   5009:        tree len, len2;
                   5010: 
                   5011:        len = c_strlen (arg1);
                   5012:        if (len)
                   5013:          len = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, integer_one_node, len);
                   5014:        len2 = c_strlen (arg2);
                   5015:        if (len2)
                   5016:          len2 = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, integer_one_node, len2);
                   5017: 
                   5018:        /* If we don't have a constant length for the first, use the length
                   5019:           of the second, if we know it.  We don't require a constant for
                   5020:           this case; some cost analysis could be done if both are available
                   5021:           but neither is constant.  For now, assume they're equally cheap.
                   5022: 
                   5023:           If both strings have constant lengths, use the smaller.  This
                   5024:           could arise if optimization results in strcpy being called with
                   5025:           two fixed strings, or if the code was machine-generated.  We should
                   5026:           add some code to the `memcmp' handler below to deal with such
                   5027:           situations, someday.  */
                   5028:        if (!len || TREE_CODE (len) != INTEGER_CST)
                   5029:          {
                   5030:            if (len2)
                   5031:              len = len2;
                   5032:            else if (len == 0)
                   5033:              break;
                   5034:          }
                   5035:        else if (len2 && TREE_CODE (len2) == INTEGER_CST)
                   5036:          {
                   5037:            if (tree_int_cst_lt (len2, len))
                   5038:              len = len2;
                   5039:          }
                   5040: 
                   5041:        chainon (arglist, build_tree_list (0, len));
                   5042:       }
                   5043: 
                   5044:       /* Drops in.  */
                   5045:     case BUILT_IN_MEMCMP:
                   5046:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   5047:       if (!optimize)
                   5048:        break;
                   5049: 
                   5050:       if (arglist == 0
                   5051:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   5052:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   5053:          || TREE_CHAIN (arglist) == 0
                   5054:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   5055:          || TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)) == 0
                   5056:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist))))) != INTEGER_TYPE)
                   5057:        return const0_rtx;
                   5058:       else if (!HAVE_cmpstrsi)
                   5059:        break;
                   5060:       {
                   5061:        tree arg1 = TREE_VALUE (arglist);
                   5062:        tree arg2 = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist));
                   5063:        tree len = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)));
                   5064:        rtx result;
                   5065: 
                   5066:        int arg1_align
                   5067:          = get_pointer_alignment (arg1, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
                   5068:        int arg2_align
                   5069:          = get_pointer_alignment (arg2, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
                   5070:        enum machine_mode insn_mode
                   5071:          = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_cmpstrsi][0];
                   5072: 
                   5073:        /* If we don't have POINTER_TYPE, call the function.  */
                   5074:        if (arg1_align == 0 || arg2_align == 0)
                   5075:          {
                   5076:            if (DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl) == BUILT_IN_STRCMP)
                   5077:              TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)) = 0;
                   5078:            break;
                   5079:          }
                   5080: 
                   5081:        /* Make a place to write the result of the instruction.  */
                   5082:        result = target;
                   5083:        if (! (result != 0
                   5084:               && GET_CODE (result) == REG && GET_MODE (result) == insn_mode
                   5085:               && REGNO (result) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   5086:          result = gen_reg_rtx (insn_mode);
                   5087: 
                   5088:        emit_insn (gen_cmpstrsi (result,
                   5089:                                 gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode,
                   5090:                                          expand_expr (arg1, 0, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL)),
                   5091:                                 gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode,
                   5092:                                          expand_expr (arg2, 0, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL)),
                   5093:                                 expand_expr (len, 0, VOIDmode, 0),
                   5094:                                 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   5095:                                          MIN (arg1_align, arg2_align))));
                   5096: 
                   5097:        /* Return the value in the proper mode for this function.  */
                   5098:        mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   5099:        if (GET_MODE (result) == mode)
                   5100:          return result;
                   5101:        else if (target != 0)
                   5102:          {
                   5103:            convert_move (target, result, 0);
                   5104:            return target;
                   5105:          }
                   5106:        else
                   5107:          return convert_to_mode (mode, result, 0);
                   5108:       }        
                   5109: #else
                   5110:     case BUILT_IN_STRCMP:
                   5111:     case BUILT_IN_MEMCMP:
                   5112:       break;
                   5113: #endif
                   5114: 
                   5115:     default:                   /* just do library call, if unknown builtin */
                   5116:       error ("built-in function %s not currently supported",
                   5117:             IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (fndecl)));
                   5118:     }
                   5119: 
                   5120:   /* The switch statement above can drop through to cause the function
                   5121:      to be called normally.  */
                   5122: 
                   5123:   return expand_call (exp, target, ignore);
                   5124: }
                   5125: 
                   5126: /* Expand code for a post- or pre- increment or decrement
                   5127:    and return the RTX for the result.
                   5128:    POST is 1 for postinc/decrements and 0 for preinc/decrements.  */
                   5129: 
                   5130: static rtx
                   5131: expand_increment (exp, post)
                   5132:      register tree exp;
                   5133:      int post;
                   5134: {
                   5135:   register rtx op0, op1;
                   5136:   register rtx temp, value;
                   5137:   register tree incremented = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   5138:   optab this_optab = add_optab;
                   5139:   int icode;
                   5140:   enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   5141:   int op0_is_copy = 0;
                   5142: 
                   5143:   /* Stabilize any component ref that might need to be
                   5144:      evaluated more than once below.  */
                   5145:   if (TREE_CODE (incremented) == BIT_FIELD_REF
                   5146:       || (TREE_CODE (incremented) == COMPONENT_REF
                   5147:          && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (incremented, 0)) != INDIRECT_REF
                   5148:              || DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (incremented, 1)))))
                   5149:     incremented = stabilize_reference (incremented);
                   5150: 
                   5151:   /* Compute the operands as RTX.
                   5152:      Note whether OP0 is the actual lvalue or a copy of it:
                   5153:      I believe it is a copy iff it is a register and insns were
                   5154:      generated in computing it.  */
                   5155:   temp = get_last_insn ();
                   5156:   op0 = expand_expr (incremented, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5157:   if (temp != get_last_insn ())
                   5158:     op0_is_copy = (GET_CODE (op0) == REG || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG);
                   5159:   op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5160: 
                   5161:   /* Decide whether incrementing or decrementing.  */
                   5162:   if (TREE_CODE (exp) == POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
                   5163:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == PREDECREMENT_EXPR)
                   5164:     this_optab = sub_optab;
                   5165: 
                   5166:   /* If OP0 is not the actual lvalue, but rather a copy in a register,
                   5167:      then we cannot just increment OP0.  We must
                   5168:      therefore contrive to increment the original value.
                   5169:      Then we can return OP0 since it is a copy of the old value.  */
                   5170:   if (op0_is_copy)
                   5171:     {
                   5172:       /* This is the easiest way to increment the value wherever it is.
                   5173:         Problems with multiple evaluation of INCREMENTED
                   5174:         are prevented because either (1) it is a component_ref,
                   5175:         in which case it was stabilized above, or (2) it is an array_ref
                   5176:         with constant index in an array in a register, which is
                   5177:         safe to reevaluate.  */
                   5178:       tree newexp = build ((this_optab == add_optab
                   5179:                            ? PLUS_EXPR : MINUS_EXPR),
                   5180:                           TREE_TYPE (exp),
                   5181:                           incremented,
                   5182:                           TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   5183:       temp = expand_assignment (incremented, newexp, ! post, 0);
                   5184:       return post ? op0 : temp;
                   5185:     }
                   5186: 
                   5187:   /* Convert decrement by a constant into a negative increment.  */
                   5188:   if (this_optab == sub_optab
                   5189:       && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
                   5190:     {
                   5191:       op1 = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, - INTVAL (op1));
                   5192:       this_optab = add_optab;
                   5193:     }
                   5194: 
                   5195:   if (post)
                   5196:     {
                   5197:       /* We have a true reference to the value in OP0.
                   5198:         If there is an insn to add or subtract in this mode, queue it.  */
                   5199: 
                   5200: #if 0  /* Turned off to avoid making extra insn for indexed memref.  */
                   5201:       op0 = stabilize (op0);
                   5202: #endif
                   5203: 
                   5204:       icode = (int) this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
                   5205:       if (icode != (int) CODE_FOR_nothing
                   5206:          /* Make sure that OP0 is valid for operands 0 and 1
                   5207:             of the insn we want to queue.  */
                   5208:          && (*insn_operand_predicate[icode][0]) (op0, mode)
                   5209:          && (*insn_operand_predicate[icode][1]) (op0, mode))
                   5210:        {
                   5211:          if (! (*insn_operand_predicate[icode][2]) (op1, mode))
                   5212:            op1 = force_reg (mode, op1);
                   5213: 
                   5214:          return enqueue_insn (op0, GEN_FCN (icode) (op0, op0, op1));
                   5215:        }
                   5216:     }
                   5217: 
                   5218:   /* Preincrement, or we can't increment with one simple insn.  */
                   5219:   if (post)
                   5220:     /* Save a copy of the value before inc or dec, to return it later.  */
                   5221:     temp = value = copy_to_reg (op0);
                   5222:   else
                   5223:     /* Arrange to return the incremented value.  */
                   5224:     /* Copy the rtx because expand_binop will protect from the queue,
                   5225:        and the results of that would be invalid for us to return
                   5226:        if our caller does emit_queue before using our result.  */
                   5227:     temp = copy_rtx (value = op0);
                   5228: 
                   5229:   /* Increment however we can.  */
                   5230:   op1 = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, value, op1, op0,
                   5231:                      TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)), OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   5232:   /* Make sure the value is stored into OP0.  */
                   5233:   if (op1 != op0)
                   5234:     emit_move_insn (op0, op1);
                   5235: 
                   5236:   return temp;
                   5237: }
                   5238: 
                   5239: /* Expand all function calls contained within EXP, innermost ones first.
                   5240:    But don't look within expressions that have sequence points.
                   5241:    For each CALL_EXPR, record the rtx for its value
                   5242:    in the CALL_EXPR_RTL field.  */
                   5243: 
                   5244: static void
                   5245: preexpand_calls (exp)
                   5246:      tree exp;
                   5247: {
                   5248:   register int nops, i;
                   5249:   int type = TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp));
                   5250: 
                   5251:   if (! do_preexpand_calls)
                   5252:     return;
                   5253: 
                   5254:   /* Only expressions and references can contain calls.  */
                   5255: 
                   5256:   if (type != 'e' && type != '<' && type != '1' && type != '2' && type != 'r')
                   5257:     return;
                   5258: 
                   5259:   switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
                   5260:     {
                   5261:     case CALL_EXPR:
                   5262:       /* Do nothing if already expanded.  */
                   5263:       if (CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp) != 0)
                   5264:        return;
                   5265: 
                   5266:       /* Do nothing to built-in functions.  */
                   5267:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) != ADDR_EXPR
                   5268:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) != FUNCTION_DECL
                   5269:          || ! DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   5270:        CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp) = expand_call (exp, 0, 0, 0);
                   5271:       return;
                   5272: 
                   5273:     case COMPOUND_EXPR:
                   5274:     case COND_EXPR:
                   5275:     case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
                   5276:     case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
                   5277:       /* If we find one of these, then we can be sure
                   5278:         the adjust will be done for it (since it makes jumps).
                   5279:         Do it now, so that if this is inside an argument
                   5280:         of a function, we don't get the stack adjustment
                   5281:         after some other args have already been pushed.  */
                   5282:       do_pending_stack_adjust ();
                   5283:       return;
                   5284: 
                   5285:     case BLOCK:
                   5286:     case RTL_EXPR:
                   5287:     case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
                   5288:       return;
                   5289: 
                   5290:     case SAVE_EXPR:
                   5291:       if (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp) != 0)
                   5292:        return;
                   5293:     }
                   5294: 
                   5295:   nops = tree_code_length[(int) TREE_CODE (exp)];
                   5296:   for (i = 0; i < nops; i++)
                   5297:     if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i) != 0)
                   5298:       {
                   5299:        type = TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i)));
                   5300:        if (type == 'e' || type == '<' || type == '1' || type == '2'
                   5301:            || type == 'r')
                   5302:          preexpand_calls (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i));
                   5303:       }
                   5304: }
                   5305: 
                   5306: /* At the start of a function, record that we have no previously-pushed
                   5307:    arguments waiting to be popped.  */
                   5308: 
                   5309: void
                   5310: init_pending_stack_adjust ()
                   5311: {
                   5312:   pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                   5313: }
                   5314: 
                   5315: /* When exiting from function, if safe, clear out any pending stack adjust
                   5316:    so the adjustment won't get done.  */
                   5317: 
                   5318: void
                   5319: clear_pending_stack_adjust ()
                   5320: {
                   5321: #ifdef EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
                   5322:   if (!flag_omit_frame_pointer && EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
                   5323:       && ! (TREE_INLINE (current_function_decl) && optimize)
                   5324:       && ! flag_inline_functions)
                   5325:     pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                   5326: #endif
                   5327: }
                   5328: 
                   5329: /* Pop any previously-pushed arguments that have not been popped yet.  */
                   5330: 
                   5331: void
                   5332: do_pending_stack_adjust ()
                   5333: {
                   5334:   if (inhibit_defer_pop == 0)
                   5335:     {
                   5336:       if (pending_stack_adjust != 0)
                   5337:        adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, pending_stack_adjust));
                   5338:       pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                   5339:     }
                   5340: }
                   5341: 
                   5342: /* Expand all cleanups up to OLD_CLEANUPS.
                   5343:    Needed here, and also for language-dependent calls.  */
                   5344: 
                   5345: void
                   5346: expand_cleanups_to (old_cleanups)
                   5347:      tree old_cleanups;
                   5348: {
                   5349:   while (cleanups_this_call != old_cleanups)
                   5350:     {
                   5351:       expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (cleanups_this_call), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5352:       cleanups_this_call = TREE_CHAIN (cleanups_this_call);
                   5353:     }
                   5354: }
                   5355: 
                   5356: /* Expand conditional expressions.  */
                   5357: 
                   5358: /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to LABEL if the value is zero.
                   5359:    LABEL is an rtx of code CODE_LABEL, in this function and all the
                   5360:    functions here.  */
                   5361: 
                   5362: void
                   5363: jumpifnot (exp, label)
                   5364:      tree exp;
                   5365:      rtx label;
                   5366: {
                   5367:   do_jump (exp, label, 0);
                   5368: }
                   5369: 
                   5370: /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to LABEL if the value is nonzero.  */
                   5371: 
                   5372: void
                   5373: jumpif (exp, label)
                   5374:      tree exp;
                   5375:      rtx label;
                   5376: {
                   5377:   do_jump (exp, 0, label);
                   5378: }
                   5379: 
                   5380: /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to IF_FALSE_LABEL if
                   5381:    the result is zero, or IF_TRUE_LABEL if the result is one.
                   5382:    Either of IF_FALSE_LABEL and IF_TRUE_LABEL may be zero,
                   5383:    meaning fall through in that case.
                   5384: 
                   5385:    This function is responsible for optimizing cases such as
                   5386:    &&, || and comparison operators in EXP.  */
                   5387: 
                   5388: void
                   5389: do_jump (exp, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5390:      tree exp;
                   5391:      rtx if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5392: {
                   5393:   register enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (exp);
                   5394:   /* Some cases need to create a label to jump to
                   5395:      in order to properly fall through.
                   5396:      These cases set DROP_THROUGH_LABEL nonzero.  */
                   5397:   rtx drop_through_label = 0;
                   5398:   rtx temp;
                   5399:   rtx comparison = 0;
                   5400:   int i;
                   5401:   tree type;
                   5402: 
                   5403:   emit_queue ();
                   5404: 
                   5405:   switch (code)
                   5406:     {
                   5407:     case ERROR_MARK:
                   5408:       break;
                   5409: 
                   5410:     case INTEGER_CST:
                   5411:       temp = integer_zerop (exp) ? if_false_label : if_true_label;
                   5412:       if (temp)
                   5413:        emit_jump (temp);
                   5414:       break;
                   5415: 
                   5416: #if 0
                   5417:       /* This is not true with #pragma weak  */
                   5418:     case ADDR_EXPR:
                   5419:       /* The address of something can never be zero.  */
                   5420:       if (if_true_label)
                   5421:        emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5422:       break;
                   5423: #endif
                   5424: 
                   5425:     case NOP_EXPR:
                   5426:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == COMPONENT_REF
                   5427:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == BIT_FIELD_REF
                   5428:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == ARRAY_REF)
                   5429:        goto normal;
                   5430:     case CONVERT_EXPR:
                   5431:       /* If we are narrowing the operand, we have to do the compare in the
                   5432:         narrower mode.  */
                   5433:       if ((TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp))
                   5434:           < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5435:        goto normal;
                   5436:     case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
                   5437:     case REFERENCE_EXPR:
                   5438:     case ABS_EXPR:
                   5439:     case NEGATE_EXPR:
                   5440:     case LROTATE_EXPR:
                   5441:     case RROTATE_EXPR:
                   5442:       /* These cannot change zero->non-zero or vice versa.  */
                   5443:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5444:       break;
                   5445: 
                   5446: #if 0
                   5447:       /* This is never less insns than evaluating the PLUS_EXPR followed by
                   5448:         a test and can be longer if the test is eliminated.  */
                   5449:     case PLUS_EXPR:
                   5450:       /* Reduce to minus.  */
                   5451:       exp = build (MINUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (exp),
                   5452:                   TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   5453:                   fold (build1 (NEGATE_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
                   5454:                                 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
                   5455:       /* Process as MINUS.  */
                   5456: #endif
                   5457: 
                   5458:     case MINUS_EXPR:
                   5459:       /* Non-zero iff operands of minus differ.  */
                   5460:       comparison = compare (build (NE_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (exp),
                   5461:                                   TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   5462:                                   TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
                   5463:                            NE, NE);
                   5464:       break;
                   5465: 
                   5466:     case BIT_AND_EXPR:
                   5467:       /* If we are AND'ing with a small constant, do this comparison in the
                   5468:         smallest type that fits.  If the machine doesn't have comparisons
                   5469:         that small, it will be converted back to the wider comparison.
                   5470:         This helps if we are testing the sign bit of a narrower object.
                   5471:         combine can't do this for us because it can't know whether a
                   5472:         ZERO_EXTRACT or a compare in a smaller mode exists, but we do.  */
                   5473: 
                   5474:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   5475:          && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   5476:          && (i = floor_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))) >= 0
                   5477:          && (type = type_for_size (i + 1, 1)) != 0
                   5478:          && TYPE_PRECISION (type) < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
                   5479:        {
                   5480:          do_jump (convert (type, exp), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5481:          break;
                   5482:        }
                   5483:       goto normal;
                   5484: 
                   5485:     case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR:
                   5486:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5487:       break;
                   5488: 
                   5489:     case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
                   5490:       if (if_false_label == 0)
                   5491:        if_false_label = drop_through_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5492:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_false_label, 0);
                   5493:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5494:       break;
                   5495: 
                   5496:     case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
                   5497:       if (if_true_label == 0)
                   5498:        if_true_label = drop_through_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5499:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, if_true_label);
                   5500:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5501:       break;
                   5502: 
                   5503:     case COMPOUND_EXPR:
                   5504:       expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5505:       free_temp_slots ();
                   5506:       emit_queue ();
                   5507:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5508:       break;
                   5509: 
                   5510:     case COMPONENT_REF:
                   5511:     case BIT_FIELD_REF:
                   5512:     case ARRAY_REF:
                   5513:       {
                   5514:        int bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp;
                   5515:        enum machine_mode mode;
                   5516:        tree type;
                   5517:        int volatilep = 0;
                   5518: 
                   5519:        /* Get description of this reference.  We don't actually care
                   5520:           about the underlying object here.  */
                   5521:        get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &mode, &unsignedp,
                   5522:                             &volatilep);
                   5523: 
                   5524:        type = type_for_size (bitsize, unsignedp);
                   5525:        if (type != 0
                   5526:            && TYPE_PRECISION (type) < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
                   5527:          {
                   5528:            do_jump (convert (type, exp), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5529:            break;
                   5530:          }
                   5531:        goto normal;
                   5532:       }
                   5533: 
                   5534:     case COND_EXPR:
                   5535:       /* Do (a ? 1 : 0) and (a ? 0 : 1) as special cases.  */
                   5536:       if (integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   5537:          && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)))
                   5538:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5539: 
                   5540:       else if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   5541:               && integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)))
                   5542:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5543: 
                   5544:       else
                   5545:        {
                   5546:          register rtx label1 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5547:          drop_through_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5548:          do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), label1, 0);
                   5549:          /* Now the THEN-expression.  */
                   5550:          do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   5551:                   if_false_label ? if_false_label : drop_through_label,
                   5552:                   if_true_label ? if_true_label : drop_through_label);
                   5553:          emit_label (label1);
                   5554:          /* Now the ELSE-expression.  */
                   5555:          do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
                   5556:                   if_false_label ? if_false_label : drop_through_label,
                   5557:                   if_true_label ? if_true_label : drop_through_label);
                   5558:        }
                   5559:       break;
                   5560: 
                   5561:     case EQ_EXPR:
                   5562:       if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   5563:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5564:       else if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5565:                == MODE_INT)
                   5566:               && 
                   5567:               !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5568:        do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp, if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5569:       else
                   5570:        comparison = compare (exp, EQ, EQ);
                   5571:       break;
                   5572: 
                   5573:     case NE_EXPR:
                   5574:       if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   5575:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5576:       else if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5577:                == MODE_INT)
                   5578:               && 
                   5579:               !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5580:        do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp, if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5581:       else
                   5582:        comparison = compare (exp, NE, NE);
                   5583:       break;
                   5584: 
                   5585:     case LT_EXPR:
                   5586:       if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5587:           == MODE_INT)
                   5588:          && !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5589:        do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, 1, if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5590:       else
                   5591:        comparison = compare (exp, LT, LTU);
                   5592:       break;
                   5593: 
                   5594:     case LE_EXPR:
                   5595:       if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5596:           == MODE_INT)
                   5597:          && !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5598:        do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, 0, if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5599:       else
                   5600:        comparison = compare (exp, LE, LEU);
                   5601:       break;
                   5602: 
                   5603:     case GT_EXPR:
                   5604:       if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5605:           == MODE_INT)
                   5606:          && !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5607:        do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, 0, if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5608:       else
                   5609:        comparison = compare (exp, GT, GTU);
                   5610:       break;
                   5611: 
                   5612:     case GE_EXPR:
                   5613:       if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5614:           == MODE_INT)
                   5615:          && !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5616:        do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, 1, if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5617:       else
                   5618:        comparison = compare (exp, GE, GEU);
                   5619:       break;
                   5620: 
                   5621:     default:
                   5622:     normal:
                   5623:       temp = expand_expr (exp, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5624: #if 0
                   5625:       /* This is not needed any more and causes poor code since it causes
                   5626:         comparisons and tests from non-SI objects to have different code
                   5627:         sequences.  */
                   5628:       /* Copy to register to avoid generating bad insns by cse
                   5629:         from (set (mem ...) (arithop))  (set (cc0) (mem ...)).  */
                   5630:       if (!cse_not_expected && GET_CODE (temp) == MEM)
                   5631:        temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
                   5632: #endif
                   5633:       do_pending_stack_adjust ();
                   5634:       if (GET_CODE (temp) == CONST_INT)
                   5635:        comparison = (temp == const0_rtx ? const0_rtx : const_true_rtx);
                   5636:       else if (GET_CODE (temp) == LABEL_REF)
                   5637:        comparison = const_true_rtx;
                   5638:       else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp)) == MODE_INT
                   5639:               && !can_compare_p (GET_MODE (temp)))
                   5640:        /* Note swapping the labels gives us not-equal.  */
                   5641:        do_jump_by_parts_equality_rtx (temp, if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5642:       else if (GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
                   5643:        comparison = compare_from_rtx (temp, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (temp)),
                   5644:                                       NE, 1, GET_MODE (temp), 0, 0);
                   5645:       else
                   5646:        abort ();
                   5647:     }
                   5648: 
                   5649:   /* Do any postincrements in the expression that was tested.  */
                   5650:   emit_queue ();
                   5651: 
                   5652:   /* If COMPARISON is nonzero here, it is an rtx that can be substituted
                   5653:      straight into a conditional jump instruction as the jump condition.
                   5654:      Otherwise, all the work has been done already.  */
                   5655: 
                   5656:   if (comparison == const_true_rtx)
                   5657:     {
                   5658:       if (if_true_label)
                   5659:        emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5660:     }
                   5661:   else if (comparison == const0_rtx)
                   5662:     {
                   5663:       if (if_false_label)
                   5664:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5665:     }
                   5666:   else if (comparison)
                   5667:     do_jump_for_compare (comparison, if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5668: 
                   5669:   free_temp_slots ();
                   5670: 
                   5671:   if (drop_through_label)
                   5672:     emit_label (drop_through_label);
                   5673: }
                   5674: 
                   5675: /* Given a comparison expression EXP for values too wide to be compared
                   5676:    with one insn, test the comparison and jump to the appropriate label.
                   5677:    The code of EXP is ignored; we always test GT if SWAP is 0,
                   5678:    and LT if SWAP is 1.  */
                   5679: 
                   5680: static void
                   5681: do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, swap, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5682:      tree exp;
                   5683:      int swap;
                   5684:      rtx if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5685: {
                   5686:   rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, swap), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5687:   rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, !swap), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5688:   enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   5689:   int nwords = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
                   5690:   rtx drop_through_label = 0;
                   5691:   int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   5692:   int i;
                   5693: 
                   5694:   if (! if_true_label || ! if_false_label)
                   5695:     drop_through_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5696:   if (! if_true_label)
                   5697:     if_true_label = drop_through_label;
                   5698:   if (! if_false_label)
                   5699:     if_false_label = drop_through_label;
                   5700: 
                   5701:   /* Compare a word at a time, high order first.  */
                   5702:   for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
                   5703:     {
                   5704:       rtx comp;
                   5705:       rtx op0_word, op1_word;
                   5706: 
                   5707:       if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
                   5708:        {
                   5709:          op0_word = operand_subword_force (op0, i, mode);
                   5710:          op1_word = operand_subword_force (op1, i, mode);
                   5711:        }
                   5712:       else
                   5713:        {
                   5714:          op0_word = operand_subword_force (op0, nwords - 1 - i, mode);
                   5715:          op1_word = operand_subword_force (op1, nwords - 1 - i, mode);
                   5716:        }
                   5717: 
                   5718:       /* All but high-order word must be compared as unsigned.  */
                   5719:       comp = compare_from_rtx (op0_word, op1_word,
                   5720:                               (unsignedp || i > 0) ? GTU : GT,
                   5721:                               unsignedp, word_mode, 0, 0);
                   5722:       if (comp == const_true_rtx)
                   5723:        emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5724:       else if (comp != const0_rtx)
                   5725:        do_jump_for_compare (comp, 0, if_true_label);
                   5726: 
                   5727:       /* Consider lower words only if these are equal.  */
                   5728:       comp = compare_from_rtx (op0_word, op1_word, NE, unsignedp, word_mode,
                   5729:                               0, 0);
                   5730:       if (comp == const_true_rtx)
                   5731:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5732:       else if (comp != const0_rtx)
                   5733:        do_jump_for_compare (comp, 0, if_false_label);
                   5734:     }
                   5735: 
                   5736:   if (if_false_label)
                   5737:     emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5738:   if (drop_through_label)
                   5739:     emit_label (drop_through_label);
                   5740: }
                   5741: 
                   5742: /* Given an EQ_EXPR expression EXP for values too wide to be compared
                   5743:    with one insn, test the comparison and jump to the appropriate label.  */
                   5744: 
                   5745: static void
                   5746: do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5747:      tree exp;
                   5748:      rtx if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5749: {
                   5750:   rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5751:   rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5752:   enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   5753:   int nwords = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
                   5754:   int i;
                   5755:   rtx drop_through_label = 0;
                   5756: 
                   5757:   if (! if_false_label)
                   5758:     drop_through_label = if_false_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5759: 
                   5760:   for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
                   5761:     {
                   5762:       rtx comp = compare_from_rtx (operand_subword_force (op0, i, mode),
                   5763:                                   operand_subword_force (op1, i, mode),
                   5764:                                   EQ, 0, word_mode, 0, 0);
                   5765:       if (comp == const_true_rtx)
                   5766:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5767:       else if (comp != const0_rtx)
                   5768:        do_jump_for_compare (comp, if_false_label, 0);
                   5769:     }
                   5770: 
                   5771:   if (if_true_label)
                   5772:     emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5773:   if (drop_through_label)
                   5774:     emit_label (drop_through_label);
                   5775: }
                   5776: 
                   5777: /* Jump according to whether OP0 is 0.
                   5778:    We assume that OP0 has an integer mode that is too wide
                   5779:    for the available compare insns.  */
                   5780: 
                   5781: static void
                   5782: do_jump_by_parts_equality_rtx (op0, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5783:      rtx op0;
                   5784:      rtx if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5785: {
                   5786:   int nwords = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   5787:   int i;
                   5788:   rtx drop_through_label = 0;
                   5789: 
                   5790:   if (! if_false_label)
                   5791:     drop_through_label = if_false_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5792: 
                   5793:   for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
                   5794:     {
                   5795:       rtx comp = compare_from_rtx (operand_subword_force (op0, i,
                   5796:                                                          GET_MODE (op0)),
                   5797:                                   const0_rtx, EQ, 0, word_mode, 0, 0);
                   5798:       if (comp == const_true_rtx)
                   5799:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5800:       else if (comp != const0_rtx)
                   5801:        do_jump_for_compare (comp, if_false_label, 0);
                   5802:     }
                   5803: 
                   5804:   if (if_true_label)
                   5805:     emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5806:   if (drop_through_label)
                   5807:     emit_label (drop_through_label);
                   5808: }
                   5809: 
                   5810: /* Given a comparison expression in rtl form, output conditional branches to
                   5811:    IF_TRUE_LABEL, IF_FALSE_LABEL, or both.  */
                   5812: 
                   5813: static void
                   5814: do_jump_for_compare (comparison, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5815:      rtx comparison, if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5816: {
                   5817:   if (if_true_label)
                   5818:     {
                   5819:       if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (comparison)] != 0)
                   5820:        emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (comparison)]) (if_true_label));
                   5821:       else
                   5822:        abort ();
                   5823: 
                   5824:       if (if_false_label)
                   5825:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5826:     }
                   5827:   else if (if_false_label)
                   5828:     {
                   5829:       rtx insn;
                   5830:       rtx prev = PREV_INSN (get_last_insn ());
                   5831:       rtx branch = 0;
                   5832: 
                   5833:       /* Output the branch with the opposite condition.  Then try to invert
                   5834:         what is generated.  If more than one insn is a branch, or if the
                   5835:         branch is not the last insn written, abort. If we can't invert
                   5836:         the branch, emit make a true label, redirect this jump to that,
                   5837:         emit a jump to the false label and define the true label.  */
                   5838: 
                   5839:       if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (comparison)] != 0)
                   5840:        emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (comparison)]) (if_false_label));
                   5841:       else
                   5842:        abort ();
                   5843: 
                   5844:       /* Here we get the insn before what was just emitted.
                   5845:         On some machines, emitting the branch can discard
                   5846:         the previous compare insn and emit a replacement.  */
                   5847:       if (prev == 0)
                   5848:        /* If there's only one preceding insn...  */
                   5849:        insn = get_insns ();
                   5850:       else
                   5851:        insn = NEXT_INSN (prev);
                   5852: 
                   5853:       for (insn = NEXT_INSN (insn); insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
                   5854:        if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
                   5855:          {
                   5856:            if (branch)
                   5857:              abort ();
                   5858:            branch = insn;
                   5859:          }
                   5860: 
                   5861:       if (branch != get_last_insn ())
                   5862:        abort ();
                   5863: 
                   5864:       if (! invert_jump (branch, if_false_label))
                   5865:        {
                   5866:          if_true_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5867:          redirect_jump (branch, if_true_label);
                   5868:          emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5869:          emit_label (if_true_label);
                   5870:        }
                   5871:     }
                   5872: }
                   5873: 
                   5874: /* Generate code for a comparison expression EXP
                   5875:    (including code to compute the values to be compared)
                   5876:    and set (CC0) according to the result.
                   5877:    SIGNED_CODE should be the rtx operation for this comparison for
                   5878:    signed data; UNSIGNED_CODE, likewise for use if data is unsigned.
                   5879: 
                   5880:    We force a stack adjustment unless there are currently
                   5881:    things pushed on the stack that aren't yet used.  */
                   5882: 
                   5883: static rtx
                   5884: compare (exp, signed_code, unsigned_code)
                   5885:      register tree exp;
                   5886:      enum rtx_code signed_code, unsigned_code;
                   5887: {
                   5888:   register rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5889:   register rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5890:   register tree type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   5891:   register enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
                   5892:   int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (type);
                   5893:   enum rtx_code code = unsignedp ? unsigned_code : signed_code;
                   5894: 
                   5895:   return compare_from_rtx (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, mode,
                   5896:                           ((mode == BLKmode)
                   5897:                            ? expr_size (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) : 0),
                   5898:                           TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT);
                   5899: }
                   5900: 
                   5901: /* Like compare but expects the values to compare as two rtx's.
                   5902:    The decision as to signed or unsigned comparison must be made by the caller.
                   5903: 
                   5904:    If MODE is BLKmode, SIZE is an RTX giving the size of the objects being
                   5905:    compared.
                   5906: 
                   5907:    If ALIGN is non-zero, it is the alignment of this type; if zero, the
                   5908:    size of MODE should be used.  */
                   5909: 
                   5910: rtx
                   5911: compare_from_rtx (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, mode, size, align)
                   5912:      register rtx op0, op1;
                   5913:      enum rtx_code code;
                   5914:      int unsignedp;
                   5915:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   5916:      rtx size;
                   5917:      int align;
                   5918: {
                   5919:   /* If one operand is constant, make it the second one.  */
                   5920: 
                   5921:   if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE)
                   5922:     {
                   5923:       rtx tem = op0;
                   5924:       op0 = op1;
                   5925:       op1 = tem;
                   5926:       code = swap_condition (code);
                   5927:     }
                   5928: 
                   5929:   if (flag_force_mem)
                   5930:     {
                   5931:       op0 = force_not_mem (op0);
                   5932:       op1 = force_not_mem (op1);
                   5933:     }
                   5934: 
                   5935:   do_pending_stack_adjust ();
                   5936: 
                   5937:   if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
                   5938:     return simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1);
                   5939: 
                   5940:   /* If this is a signed equality comparison, we can do it as an
                   5941:      unsigned comparison since zero-extension is cheaper than sign
                   5942:      extension and comparisons with zero are done as unsigned.  If we
                   5943:      are comparing against a constant, we must convert it to what it
                   5944:      would look like unsigned.  */
                   5945:   if ((code == EQ || code == NE) && ! unsignedp
                   5946:       && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   5947:     {
                   5948:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   5949:          && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) != INTVAL (op1))
                   5950:        op1 = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, 
                   5951:                       INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0)));
                   5952:       unsignedp = 1;
                   5953:     }
                   5954:        
                   5955:   emit_cmp_insn (op0, op1, code, size, mode, unsignedp, align);
                   5956: 
                   5957:   return gen_rtx (code, VOIDmode, cc0_rtx, const0_rtx);
                   5958: }
                   5959: 
                   5960: /* Generate code to calculate EXP using a store-flag instruction
                   5961:    and return an rtx for the result.
                   5962:    If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
                   5963: 
                   5964:    If ONLY_CHEAP is non-zero, only do this if it is likely to be very
                   5965:    cheap.
                   5966: 
                   5967:    Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
                   5968:    available on this machine.
                   5969: 
                   5970:    Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
                   5971:    we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
                   5972:    re-evaluate the expression.  We emit the store-flag insn by calling
                   5973:    emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
                   5974:    to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful.  If we think that
                   5975:    it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
                   5976:    set/jump/set sequence.  */
                   5977: 
                   5978: static rtx
                   5979: do_store_flag (exp, target, mode, only_cheap)
                   5980:      tree exp;
                   5981:      rtx target;
                   5982:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   5983:      int only_cheap;
                   5984: {
                   5985:   enum rtx_code code;
                   5986:   tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   5987:   tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   5988:   tree tem;
                   5989:   tree type = TREE_TYPE (arg0);
                   5990:   enum machine_mode operand_mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
                   5991:   int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (type);
                   5992:   rtx op0, op1;
                   5993:   enum insn_code icode;
                   5994:   rtx subtarget = target;
                   5995:   rtx result, label, pattern, jump_pat;
                   5996: 
                   5997:   /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
                   5998:      passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag.  */
                   5999:   if (operand_mode == BLKmode)
                   6000:     return 0;
                   6001: 
                   6002:   while (TREE_CODE (arg0) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR)
                   6003:     arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0);
                   6004: 
                   6005:   while (TREE_CODE (arg1) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR)
                   6006:     arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0);
                   6007: 
                   6008:   /* Put a constant second.  */
                   6009:   if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == REAL_CST || TREE_CODE (arg0) == INTEGER_CST)
                   6010:     {
                   6011:       tem = arg0; arg0 = arg1; arg1 = tem;
                   6012:     }
                   6013: 
                   6014:   /* Get the rtx comparison code to use.  We know that EXP is a comparison
                   6015:      operation of some type.  Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
                   6016:      converted to comparisons with zero.  Do so here so that the tests
                   6017:      below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero.  */
                   6018: 
                   6019:   switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
                   6020:     {
                   6021:     case EQ_EXPR:
                   6022:       code = EQ;
                   6023:       break;
                   6024:     case NE_EXPR:
                   6025:       code = NE;
                   6026:       break;
                   6027:     case LT_EXPR:
                   6028:       if (integer_onep (arg1))
                   6029:        arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
                   6030:       else
                   6031:        code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT;
                   6032:       break;
                   6033:     case LE_EXPR:
                   6034:       if (integer_all_onesp (arg1))
                   6035:        arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT;
                   6036:       else
                   6037:        code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
                   6038:       break;
                   6039:     case GT_EXPR:
                   6040:       if (integer_all_onesp (arg1))
                   6041:        arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
                   6042:       else
                   6043:        code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
                   6044:       break;
                   6045:     case GE_EXPR:
                   6046:       if (integer_onep (arg1))
                   6047:        arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
                   6048:       else
                   6049:        code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
                   6050:       break;
                   6051:     default:
                   6052:       abort ();
                   6053:     }
                   6054: 
                   6055:   /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
                   6056:      do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
                   6057:      masking the result with the constant 1.  If the condition was EQ,
                   6058:      we xor it with 1.  This does not require an scc insn and is faster
                   6059:      than an scc insn even if we have it.  */
                   6060: 
                   6061:   if ((code == NE || code == EQ)
                   6062:       && TREE_CODE (arg0) == BIT_AND_EXPR && integer_zerop (arg1)
                   6063:       && integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1))
                   6064:       && TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   6065:     {
                   6066:       int bitnum = exact_log2 (INTVAL (expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1),
                   6067:                                                    0, VOIDmode, 0)));
                   6068: 
                   6069:       if (subtarget == 0 || GET_CODE (subtarget) != REG
                   6070:          || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode
                   6071:          || ! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)))
                   6072:        subtarget = 0;
                   6073: 
                   6074:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   6075: 
                   6076:       if (bitnum != 0)
                   6077:        op0 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (op0), op0,
                   6078:                            size_int (bitnum), target, 1);
                   6079: 
                   6080:       if (GET_MODE (op0) != mode)
                   6081:        op0 = convert_to_mode (mode, op0, 1);
                   6082: 
                   6083:       if (bitnum != TYPE_PRECISION (type) - 1)
                   6084:        op0 = expand_and (op0, const1_rtx, target);
                   6085: 
                   6086:       if (code == EQ)
                   6087:        op0 = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0, const1_rtx, target, 0,
                   6088:                            OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   6089: 
                   6090:       return op0;
                   6091:     }
                   6092: 
                   6093:   /* Now see if we are likely to be able to do this.  Return if not.  */
                   6094:   if (! can_compare_p (operand_mode))
                   6095:     return 0;
                   6096:   icode = setcc_gen_code[(int) code];
                   6097:   if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
                   6098:       || (only_cheap && insn_operand_mode[(int) icode][0] != mode))
                   6099:     {
                   6100:       /* We can only do this if it is one of the special cases that
                   6101:         can be handled without an scc insn.  */
                   6102:       if ((code == LT && integer_zerop (arg1))
                   6103:          || (! only_cheap && code == GE && integer_zerop (arg1)))
                   6104:        ;
                   6105:       else if (BRANCH_COST >= 0
                   6106:               && ! only_cheap && (code == NE || code == EQ)
                   6107:               && TREE_CODE (type) != REAL_TYPE
                   6108:               && ((abs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code
                   6109:                    != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                   6110:                   || (ffs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code
                   6111:                       != CODE_FOR_nothing)))
                   6112:        ;
                   6113:       else
                   6114:        return 0;
                   6115:     }
                   6116:       
                   6117:   preexpand_calls (exp);
                   6118:   if (subtarget == 0 || GET_CODE (subtarget) != REG
                   6119:       || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode
                   6120:       || ! safe_from_p (subtarget, arg1))
                   6121:     subtarget = 0;
                   6122: 
                   6123:   op0 = expand_expr (arg0, subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   6124:   op1 = expand_expr (arg1, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   6125: 
                   6126:   if (target == 0)
                   6127:     target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   6128: 
                   6129:   result = emit_store_flag (target, code, op0, op1, operand_mode,
                   6130:                            unsignedp, 1);
                   6131: 
                   6132:   if (result)
                   6133:     return result;
                   6134: 
                   6135:   /* If this failed, we have to do this with set/compare/jump/set code.  */
                   6136:   if (target == 0 || GET_CODE (target) != REG
                   6137:       || reg_mentioned_p (target, op0) || reg_mentioned_p (target, op1))
                   6138:     target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
                   6139: 
                   6140:   emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx);
                   6141:   result = compare_from_rtx (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, operand_mode, 0, 0);
                   6142:   if (GET_CODE (result) == CONST_INT)
                   6143:     return result == const0_rtx ? const0_rtx : const1_rtx;
                   6144: 
                   6145:   label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   6146:   if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) code] == 0)
                   6147:     abort ();
                   6148: 
                   6149:   emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) code]) (label));
                   6150:   emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx);
                   6151:   emit_label (label);
                   6152: 
                   6153:   return target;
                   6154: }
                   6155: 
                   6156: /* Generate a tablejump instruction (used for switch statements).  */
                   6157: 
                   6158: #ifdef HAVE_tablejump
                   6159: 
                   6160: /* INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
                   6161:    in the table already subtracted.
                   6162:    RANGE is the length of the jump table.
                   6163:    TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
                   6164: 
                   6165:    DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
                   6166:    index value is out of range.  */
                   6167: 
                   6168: void
                   6169: do_tablejump (index, range, table_label, default_label)
                   6170:      rtx index, range, table_label, default_label;
                   6171: {
                   6172:   register rtx temp, vector;
                   6173: 
                   6174:   emit_cmp_insn (range, index, LTU, 0, GET_MODE (index), 0, 0);
                   6175:   emit_jump_insn (gen_bltu (default_label));
                   6176:   /* If flag_force_addr were to affect this address
                   6177:      it could interfere with the tricky assumptions made
                   6178:      about addresses that contain label-refs,
                   6179:      which may be valid only very near the tablejump itself.  */
                   6180:   /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
                   6181:      GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are.  The other
                   6182:      uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses.  This code
                   6183:      could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size.  */
                   6184:   index = memory_address_noforce
                   6185:     (CASE_VECTOR_MODE,
                   6186:      gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode,
                   6187:              gen_rtx (MULT, Pmode, index,
                   6188:                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   6189:                                GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE))),
                   6190:              gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, table_label)));
                   6191:   temp = gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE);
                   6192:   vector = gen_rtx (MEM, CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index);
                   6193:   RTX_UNCHANGING_P (vector) = 1;
                   6194:   convert_move (temp, vector, 0);
                   6195: 
                   6196:   emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp, table_label));
                   6197: 
                   6198: #ifndef CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
                   6199:   /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
                   6200:      table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER.  */
                   6201:   if (! flag_pic)
                   6202:     emit_barrier ();
                   6203: #endif
                   6204: }
                   6205: 
                   6206: #endif /* HAVE_tablejump */

unix.superglobalmegacorp.com

This archive runs on limited infrastructure. Preserving old code on modern bandwidth. Automated agents are requested to crawl responsibly.